JP7443090B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that execute a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group.

For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that can execute a group effect in which images of a plurality of characters and objects appear.

JP2019-050851A

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to enjoy the fun of the game by executing a group effect, but there is still room for improvement regarding such a group effect .

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more suitably execute a group effect.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A production execution means is provided.
The effect execution means is capable of executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The performance execution means is
When executing the group effect based on the first variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect based on the second variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from a predetermined number of frames ;
By displaying the character whose display ends last in the third display period in an enlarged manner, the character is displayed in the first display period while reducing the visibility of the background image that was displayed in the first display period. switching from the previously displayed background image to a different background image, and performing the group effect so that the different background image becomes visible in conjunction with the end of the display of the character;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, group effects can be executed more suitably.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12),
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, since the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, they are less noticeable. In addition, it is possible to execute group effects more suitably.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing a group effect in which images of a plurality of characters and objects appear, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-050851. However, in such gaming machines, it is possible to enjoy the fun of the game by executing group effects, but there is still room for improvement regarding such group effects, and in consideration of this point, it is possible to enjoy the fun of the game. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute a group performance.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
Group effect execution means (for example, group effect execution processing shown in FIG. 47, 6 shown in FIGS. 94-100 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, group effects can be executed more suitably.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control board concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the storage area concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining moving image data and text display process tables related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display process table regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of text display control regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display setting information regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing effect drawing commands related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of image processing related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and drawing processing pattern regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure showing the production execution period concerning feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. It is a front view showing a light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts in (B). (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit as viewed diagonally from the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E- in Figure 10-7(A). It is an E sectional view. (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B). FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second production unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second production unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a GG sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a HH sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second presentation unit. (A) is a front view showing a third performance unit and a fourth performance unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. 10-20 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. It is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility situation of the 3rd production unit and the 4th production unit. It is a figure showing composition of a 3rd production unit and a 4th production unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located in the production position. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a diagram looking into between a game board and an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. installed in a pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining a hit type. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. It is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a production control command. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. It is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table in each preview performance. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group advance notice work process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overall picture of a six-person group preview. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an auxiliary display used in a group preview performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview performance. It is a diagram looking into the space between the game board and the image display device during execution of the group preview performance. It is a diagram showing the whole picture of the Bakuchu group preview. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of a child table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for board left lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for attacker lamps in the reach line brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background preview brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a background notice luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full lighting. It is a figure for explaining an example of a brightness data table at the time of PUSH effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table according to a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group preview luminance data table according to a modification. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode of a comparative example when a six-person group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a background preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a lamp preview is executed at stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. It is a figure for explaining the detail of Boingo group notice. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group notice according to a modification is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of a six-person group notice and a dog group notice. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or 2,
Comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, so that they are less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
A protruding portion (e.g., protruding portion 3A) provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side than the electronic component;
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the protrusion and becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Form 4,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 601, 801) are dark colored (e.g., black) (modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion, making it less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The specific member is characterized in that the brightness or saturation of the color is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, since the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, it is possible to make the electronic component relatively less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least some aspects in common with the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. (See Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to Form 7 or 8,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the transparent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the light-transmitting member are different members.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by the player, the boundaries between the electronic components and specific components are obscured by the decorative parts, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative parts are larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative parts, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The light transmittance of the boundary corresponding area is lower than the light transmittance of the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 11 or 12,
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player focuses on the logotype and becomes less aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, second presentation LED 404A) that can cause the decoration part (for example, decoration part 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decoration part 420 emits light from the front surface of the convex part 410 by being emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the convex part 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 801), a presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. (See Figure 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) (FIG. 10). -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 18,
A presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player has better visibility than the color of the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with a high level of color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has a light emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of emitting light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
It further includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided at a different position from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) of transmitting the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) is higher than that of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see Figure 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the electronic components become less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 21,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light transmitting member is reduced, making the electronic components less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is similar to the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, making the electronic component less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", it is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. The type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting a “normal pattern” in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is being executed, and a pre-read preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo-like multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of pending memories, game status), commands that specify the occurrence of errors, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command specifying the time of recovery from a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 indicates, for example, that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power outage or is in the process of recovering from the power outage. , performs a screen display for notification. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts regarding setting values)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting values can be changed, and a lock switch for changing the setting value changing state, which will be described later. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as winning probability (ball output rate), and an opening sensor that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which a game parlor attendant or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch that can be operated by an attendant of the game hall are provided in the setting changeover main body, and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case housing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, but they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a designated door key. . Furthermore, since the lock switch requires the operation of a setting key owned by an attendant of the game parlor, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be turned on and off using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but a single key may be used for both.

A display monitor that can display set values and base values is arranged in the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case. That is, the display monitor is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is open. This is the front of the pachinko game machine 1, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is placed in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The first to fourth display parts of the display monitor are each made up of 7 segments that are made up of 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots placed on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

A game information display section may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are arranged all together. The round display device can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy/high-base state as a time-saving state or a jackpot game state. The variable probability lamp lights up when in a variable probability state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time is being saved. The round indicator consists of five segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. Further, as for the setting value, the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the value becomes more advantageous for the gaming parlor side. Note that if the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. Good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the production control board 12 regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit that can control execution of a performance using some or all of a plurality of performance devices such as LEDs for use in production, movable members for performance such as the movable body 32, etc., is integrated on one chip. . The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while some or all of the audio processing circuit 91AK133, lamp control circuit 91AK134, and motor control circuit 91AK135 are provided with the production control microprocessor 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 stores in advance performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data representing display images on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 only needs to include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data that is sprite image data that is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is used. It's fine if it's prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, image data of arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, effect images showing people, figures, symbols, etc., and background images are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. All you have to do is stay there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that allows characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be any nonvolatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal use state where the progress of the performance is controlled, the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for effect control. The RAM91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout signal is generated as a time elapsed signal. generate a signal. The timeout signal is input to the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. Upon generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the production control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM91AK124 stores various table data used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM91AK124 contains table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and table data constituting various production control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The performance control pattern includes, for example, performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, an end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the production control pattern and production control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands in which a series of transfer commands and the like to be executed by the VDP91AK132 are written in accordance with the order of image processing. The display list may include a mixture of display control commands, audio control commands, lamp control commands, and motor control commands. By controlling the progress of the performance using such a display list, it is sufficient to be able to control the electric components for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electric components for presentation. The CPU 91AK131 only needs to be able to read the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a shorter reading time than the reading time of the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes a performance control process for controlling the progress of the performance using the electric parts for the performance according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The production control processing includes, for example, a fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, a variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK125 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 temporarily stores various data in the RAM 91AK125. Variation data read processing for reading variation data of Good too.

The VDP91AK132 determines the content of control of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands and register settings from the CPU91AK131. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls the variable display of decorative patterns and various types of effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor that has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. Note that the VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction part (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing etc. according to the decoding result. For example, a group of instructions for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and outputs the separated data into video data and audio data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the video data, or some or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. It's okay. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the vector format character image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 performs image conversion processing to display the character image specified by the character image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert vector format text image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs image conversion processing to display the text image specified by the text image specification information in the display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with various areas such as a palette area where palette data is placed, a character buffer where character image data is stored, a text buffer where text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. It is used for preservation. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (gradation control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, polygons, etc. data), etc. Note that the frame buffer includes, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a real display area that stores display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may also be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 in the virtual display area of the frame buffer is created, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. In this way, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores display data of each effect image created by drawing processing. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank occurs. The V blank is generated at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may also be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area every time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and an image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. Display data created in the drawing process is stored in the storage area.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R, based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Furthermore, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the performance data memory 91AK123, ROM91AK124, etc., for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding the audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light emission modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP91AK132, and outputs it to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs it to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and is capable of storing various data used to control the progress of the performance.

FIG. 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the storage area for effect control depending on the storage contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided, for example, so as to be included in the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs and the like. For example, table data that is the configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data that constitutes the performance control pattern, etc. are stored in the storage area as management data. It is sufficient if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table that defines procedures for displaying production images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. All you have to do is stay there. The image processing program may include a program that converts vector format image data to bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program that generates a bitmap text image based on text written using character codes and font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and its related data. For video data, compressed image information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding processing such as motion compensated predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files that constitute a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table performs a display control process that allows the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed in correspondence with the moving image data. The display mode of a moving image is a mode or form when a moving image is played back and displayed, including a display style and a display layout of the moving image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be still image data in which arbitrary character images representing a plurality of types of decorative designs, people, figures, symbols, etc. are described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files that constitute a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image related data including text image data and its related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. Text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of multiple character images, and includes arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient that the unit is recognizable. Further, the text image data may represent a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using text image data may indicate subtitles, subtitles, or other information-conveying characters. It may also indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP91AK132 executes an image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the text image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that table data and data files that constitute the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance using a moving image display, and can be played back and output as any audio as the performance progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is fine as long as it is done. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Note that table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as production control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and text display process table according to the contents of the reach effect. In the super reach reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect by displaying the moving image is performed and the period in which the effect by displaying the text image is performed may be partly or completely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image that is a combination of a plurality of character images.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined according to the content of the reach effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among these, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the reach effect. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, there are cases where the text display process table can be determined in common even for different reach effect contents, and cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

Text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", the decision cannot be made. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", the decision cannot be made. In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD11. Can be displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (Jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD02 is executed, and if the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Can be displayed. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to and displayed on a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows an example of the structure of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach effect of SP reach A. A configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in accordance with the production is shown. FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to SP reach B's reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include text image designation information and text display setting information that are set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies, for each text image to be displayed, a start time to start displaying the text image and an end time to end the display. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image in the reach effect has started, or may be specified using the elapsed time since the variable display has started. It's okay. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the video image, the start and end times of the text display period are determined using the elapsed time since the video image display started. It is desirable to specify. The elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display changed to the reach mode, so even if the video image is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display changed to the reach mode, The timing at which the display starts may vary. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used for displaying a text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can be used to specify the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). may be information that specifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner based on display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table only needs to be able to set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other in a text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T10. Display of a moving image starts at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image. Note that timing T08 is a timing that arrives after timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. Display. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image specification information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common to a second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 text display periods are included. In this case, the first text display period has a part in common with the second text display period, and a part in common with the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a period that is partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period that is partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. In this way, a part of the first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and a part of the second text display period may be included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

Depending on the settings in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image specification information can be displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As a second text display period included in the first text display period, a text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, text image designation information 91AKA03 or text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is applied to the display of the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification information is used to display the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the display of the text images can be improved. Components can be changed. Note that when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text image serving as the display mode may be changed in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When video images using common video data are displayed, some or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You can also let In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image, or it is possible to change part or all of the text image added to one moving image. You can also use it as

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA23 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. Displays the specified text image.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field allows setting of the font family, which is the font type, for the font of characters included in the text image. The fontSize field allows you to set the font size at which the text image will be displayed. The fontWeight field allows setting the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field allows setting the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field allows setting the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as regular, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters included in a text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorative displays added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information allows the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to be set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, due to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As a second text display period included in this first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a third text display period included in the first text display period is specified by text image specification information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in different display layouts. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in a text display setting different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The information 91 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by AKB13. In this way, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. In addition to displaying the text image in one display mode, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. At the same time, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is first displayed. The text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of text images added to a moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from other text images. Furthermore, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, there are cases in which the text image in the second display mode is changed to a text image in the third display mode and then displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, as in the case where the text image of the mode is changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text The text image specified by the specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Further, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display. Also, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. In this case, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. Further, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Furthermore, in the plurality of text display process tables, at least some of the text image specification information and text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , some or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and second component regarding the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF using the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is a second component regarding the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed depending on the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable depending on the reach effect content etc. even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, for example, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at different rates depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" or not is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be determined, or may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Furthermore, even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information, the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, can be changed depending on the execution result of the production control program by the CPU91AK131. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 only needs to be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on display control commands from the CPU91AK131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing some of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, thereby preventing an increase in data volume and processing load. , it becomes possible to display a variety of text images. When changing the display color of a text image, other display styles may also be correspondingly changeable. For example, if the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image will be easier for the player to visually recognize, and if the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image will be difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed so that This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's discomfort when displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an example of performing an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, text images are displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods along with the moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, a moving image is displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, an effect display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete is performed, and for example, the battle result is displayed. It is sufficient that the contents of the effect display be the same until the timing of notification. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 becomes high, and when the display result of the variable display is a "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01. becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even in the video display period which is the common effect display content, the jackpot expectation level can be varied depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. I can do it.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image designation information 91AKA01 corresponds to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the origin coordinates (300,30), for example, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The font family is AA_gothic, which is a Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, the text image display color changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF, The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes image conversion processing to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

Further, in the production execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is changed to the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by . In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the origin coordinates (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponds to normal character thickness, the text image display color is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is left justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The production execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal Components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding regular font, character arrangement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decorations as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, text styles, and text alignment have changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

The production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the text image display color is gold, corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is effect_gold, which is the effect display setting for gold display. Compared to the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Text style, text placement, and text decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by text image specification information, among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, data to be changed and data not to be changed can be individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this manner, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if you want to change and display one data among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, the first data and Other data associated in advance may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold" and displaying it, it is only necessary to change the text decoration to the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold.

The display color and background display color of the text image are for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, when the brightness (gradation) is between "0" and "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In text display setting information, the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field has a common data format with the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field, for example, in character display setting information used to display character images. All you have to do is stay there. Further, the coordinates of the origin when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a common data format with the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information can be shared with field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is only necessary that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using information common to a production image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Font families that can be set when displaying text images are not set when displaying character images. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Furthermore, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontSize field corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in a production image different from the text image. Good too. Thereby, a variety of text images can be displayed by flexibly changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

For example, if a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the text decoration becomes the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and to display gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display a special effect image. In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image specification information 91A13 specifies a specific text image indicating the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 allows for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., a specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for golden display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the presentation by displaying the text image.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an effect is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, by adding an effect using a text image display using text image data, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect. This makes it easier to provide information that is different from the content of the performance. In this case, if the data structure is such that text image data is compressed and encoded and multiplexed as video data included in the video data, the outline of the text image will be Problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. Additionally, if different video data is prepared depending on the display content of the text image display added to the video display, the data capacity of the video data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It becomes easier. If special compression encoding processing or decompression decoding processing is performed in order to prevent deterioration of display quality in text image display, there is a risk that the processing load of image data will further increase.

The characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK add a text image display effect using text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 when a moving image display effect using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance. In addition, since text image display effects are added using text image data stored separately from the video data, it is possible to avoid an increase in the data capacity of the video data and an increase in the processing load of the image data. , it becomes possible to appropriately control the display so as to prevent it as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information, as a first component related to the text image, designates the display content of the text image according to the text image data. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to perform image conversion processing, etc. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one video image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first and second components related to the text image added to the first video image, various text image displays can be performed easily and with high quality, and data capacity and processing burden can be reduced. Appropriate display control becomes possible so that the increase is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. If the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In addition, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is displayed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added to and displayed on a plurality of mutually different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to multiple video images, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and increases in data volume and processing load are prevented. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the line "It's super hot" are displayed based on the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image that shows the line "Super hot" is a text image that corresponds to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a "jackpot". It only needs to be a text image. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode regarding the specific text image, may be changeable at multiple timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control in a case where the display style of a text image indicating the line "Super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no text decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042 is During the display period, the display color is gold and no text decoration is set, and during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the effect display setting is such that the text decoration is gold. Note that the text image display styles that are common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 include a font whose font family is DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font by the fontFamily field, and a font size of 72px by the fontSize field, respectively. It is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black, which corresponds to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting, which corresponds to none. As a result, the display aspect including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is displayed in black and has no text decoration.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed, for example, by displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the text image display is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to effect display settings for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is set to a gold effect display setting. In addition to setting the display color of a text image to gold, if you set the character decoration of the text image to an effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the outline of the text image Effect images can be added and displayed around text images using display colors such as shading and shading, border display using bevels and embossing, layer styles that add glow, and combinations of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to giving the text image a glossy appearance, by adding and displaying an effect image around the text image, it becomes easier for players to recognize the golden display, and the game It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, one part of the text image is distinguished from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in different display styles. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image with the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image called "Character" out of the text information indicating the line "If this character wins..." to display the display color and background of the text image differently from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and font style.

FIGS. 8-9 show an example of a display in which a portion of a text image has a display style different from that of other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic text style, and the other part of the text image is displayed with a black display color. Display the background display color as white and the text style as normal. The text display setting information 91 AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image called "Character", and the color field sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, the backgroundColor field sets the background display color to black corresponding to #000000, Set the italics corresponding to the italic character style using the fontStyle field. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, with the color field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF. Set the normal font corresponding to the character style normal. Thereby, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In displaying a text image constituting a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a display style different from other portions may be changeable in accordance with the progress of the presentation by displaying the moving image. For example, when the performance of a song or the audio playback of dialogue progresses as a video image is displayed, a part of the text image that corresponds to the progress status is displayed in a display style that is different from other parts, such as display in a specific color or highlight display. You may let them. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed as fade-in or fade-out in accordance with the progress of the performance of the music or the audio reproduction of the lines. This is not limited to the situation in which a song is played along with a video image or the audio of a line is being played, but a part of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other parts can be changed depending on the elapsed time in the execution of a given performance. It may be possible. Thereby, in displaying the text image, a portion displayed in a display style different from other portions is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby making it possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of the following: display control that allows changes to be made depending on the content of the video, or display control that allows text images to be added and displayed using common text image data for multiple video images. It may also be possible to do one without executing the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be arbitrary components that can be changed, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. In place of or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of a text image, it is possible to change any component related to the display of a text image. It's okay. For example, when moving and displaying a text image, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying enlarged or reduced text images, and the enlargement and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time. Any configuration element that can be set regarding the display of a text image may be changed as long as it is possible to change any component that can be set regarding the display of a text image, such as the time interval or amount of change for updating the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio when changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio.

When displaying a text image corresponding to common display content, the display mode of the text image can be changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in Figure 8-6(A). The present invention is not limited to changing the display color, but may be any display mode that can be changed such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 has origin coordinates, font family, Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be able to change a display mode different from the text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least some text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive and cursive, is multiplexed and compression encoded as part of the video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display a text image in a specific manner by decoding it or the like. In this case, data regarding a text image in a specific manner is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the data related to text images includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. It's okay.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may also be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 using text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize, for example.

The scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only with data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or with, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images, such as word font data, which is not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be prepared. If only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images, not limited to those used in display effects, is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused, so it is easier to design effects for displaying text images. The burden can be reduced, and when a large amount of text images are used in display effects, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As a second component related to a text image, a specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to a text image showing the line "Super hot". , any text image that is preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group may be used. For example, among the plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as the specific text image. In this way, for a specific text image that corresponds to an audio production or a display production whose content changes depending on the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image, the second component such as the display mode can be set in multiple ways. It may be possible to change the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display where the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display where the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be a specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to a text image of display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot", but a text image of display content that suggests that the probability of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot gaming state, but may include special gaming states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") which is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and that it can be performed in the time-saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (e.g., "100") that is higher than the second number (e.g., "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is higher than the second probability (e.g., 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chances (for example, "5"). It may also include a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10") resulting in a more advantageous gaming situation for the player.

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold, which corresponds to "gold"; for example, it may be silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any other color different from metallic colors. This may include cases where the display color is set. The present invention is not limited to the display color of the text image, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings should be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image. Bye.

When displaying a text image as a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as intra-character coordinates or display time when displaying the text image. For example, if the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the display color can be changed to a different display color for each character coordinate of the text image. , it would be good if rainbow display were possible. For example, for the coordinates in the character 1, depending on the elapsed time, the display color changes from red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then from bluish-purple to reddish-purple. You can change multiple display colors one after another. At this time, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted and each The display color of the coordinates within the text may be changed in the following order: red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-violet, and red-violet. After red-purple, you can change the display color by returning to red again. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" using the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image. Note that by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow manner. Alternatively, by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this way, a text image may be displayed in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether or not a specific movement of the player is detected, or multiple components may be changed at different rates. It may be possible to change either one. The specific actions of the player that enable the first component and the second component related to the text image to be changed include, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, and other operations such as a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary action of tilting the button 31b, or it may be an action of pressing down the push button 31b. The player's movements are not limited to those that can be detected, but are based on the detection results of any changes or differences in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control on the detection target, or changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target. In addition, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. Detection devices capable of detecting movements, changes, differences, etc. in a detection target, such as infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, CCD sensors, and CMOS sensors, can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically, Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effect by displaying a text image using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to these determination ratio settings, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the rate at which the effect by text image display according to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. is made different depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is easily executed. The ratio of performance based on image display increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" and the effect by text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value, but is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, within a range where the setting value is a specific setting value, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, setting suggestion performance may be made executable at a higher rate than in a period other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range that is a period other than the special period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower than in a range that is a special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate during a special period, but is not executed during a period other than the special period. In this way, within the special period, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed within a period other than the special period.

The present invention is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is met, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not met. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower in a range where the special condition is not met than in a range where the special condition is met. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that becomes executable at a predetermined rate when a special condition is met, but is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed in a range where the special condition is not satisfied. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance or the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be any condition that can be established depending on the judgment or decision. Not limited to setting suggestion effects, any effect may be one that can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met or not. The production mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. . In addition, a restriction may be set for an arbitrary performance such that a specific performance is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is met, or compared to a range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set such that the execution rate decreases and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means is capable of changing the second component regarding the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. Good too. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot," for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, etc. , it is possible to add and display character images using data related to common character images. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means controls the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to one moving image. The second component may be changeable. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component regarding the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configuration related to the feature parts 91AK and 92AK may be combined with part or all of the configuration related to the feature part 60AK as appropriate. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of a suggestion effect mode, and in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, or a character image using data related to a common character image may be created for the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. It may be possible to add and display it.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of a screen display in the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 01AKA1, a first pending display area 01AKB1, a second pending display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed in accordance with the first pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed in accordance with the second pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display, which are specific displays, are possible based on information regarding variable display. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display," and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display."

For example, the first hold display area 01AKB1 can display holds that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the first hold display is aligned to the right. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold displays can be displayed that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second hold display is aligned to the left. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first pending display that was erased (digested) in the first pending display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special figure game is started, and the second special figure game is started. In response to the start, active display is started in accordance with the second pending display that was erased (expired) in the second pending display area 01AKB2. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first pending display and the second pending display.For example, the active display may be common with the first pending display and the second pending display. The effect image may be displayed larger than each pending display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first pending display or the second pending display by executing the active display change effect. In addition, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, so that the active display can be distinguished from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the decorative design, and can be displayed variably in a manner that is partially or completely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing a decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the production image showing a small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decorative pattern. Since it is an image showing the numbers given and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misrecognizing the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols serving as reduced identification information is performed, and a determined small symbol serving as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that instructs color blending to invert color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by changing magnification. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that instructs to change the offset amount of the image position.

The effect drawing command may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for controlling drawing, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string that is a combination of a plurality of commands for the VDP91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order of description in the display list. The effect drawing command may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that commands color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal registers of the VDP91AK132 store control data that specifies calculation targets included in the display list, numerical data that specifies parameters, and other register values, and by storing register values according to execution commands, Drawing according to the display list starts.

When performing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by texture mapping using bilinear interpolation on image data, for example. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images thus generated, a combined reduced image is generated by performing a color blending process such as alpha blending. Thereafter, by executing an enlargement process on the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is blurred.

When executing a color blend that inverts color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, are set. Execute the difference calculation process. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80=175. By executing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is You can change the image and draw the generated image.

When executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. Using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to perform a blurring process. The generated image can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image becomes the same.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, for example, execute monochrome conversion calculation processing for each pixel on RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, by substituting RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion, color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome. In this manner, by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is subjected to monochrome conversion.

When performing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, two types of rotated images are generated for an image with a rotation angle of 0 degrees, an image with a rotation angle of 2 degrees, and an image with a rotation angle of 4 degrees. Using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to create a blurred image. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the image position information is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing on the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information, such as UV coordinate values, when drawing an image is changed in accordance with an offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the texture arrangement is different.

In this way, the effect drawing commands may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that change the color information included in the image data so that the generated image can be drawn. Furthermore, the effect drawing commands may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that changes arbitrary attribute information regarding image data to enable drawing of the generated image.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing a composition process using color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among these, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and displays an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and renders an effect image corresponding to pending display or active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL3 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays an effect image used for a chance-up effect that increases the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays performance images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Draw as possible. Layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image, etc., which becomes a background image, so that it can be displayed.

The display layer in which the plurality of effect images are arranged is specified, for example, by display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 is specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on each display layer are specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. Good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing the respective effect images in a superimposed manner. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be a different value depending on the layer to which it is drawn. For example, a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned is placed closer (forward) in the Z-axis direction than a display layer to which a larger Z value is assigned, and has a higher image display priority. Just do it like this.

When the VDP91AK132 writes image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like, the display priority can be determined by performing a Z value comparison operation. At this time, for example, image data of a performance image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over image data of a performance image with a large Z value. As a result, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned, and from the player's perspective. It can be placed on the near side (front side). On the other hand, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned will have a lower display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned, and the player will It can be placed on the back side (rear side). Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be an inverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value has a higher Z value than a display layer to which a smaller value is assigned as a Z value. It may be arranged on the near side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the rendering process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are combined in a superimposed manner as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Among layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed using a different drawing process from the effect images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the result of decoding an instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be processed is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and stored in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM91AK147. Just remember it. The image data to be subjected to the effect processing is designated by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 among the plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed in accordance with the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP91AK132 uses some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 to execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, so that any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, All you have to do is perform color blending accordingly. In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn in correspondence with the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 draws on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command using some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. The images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. As a result, images drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing effect color blending. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn in accordance with the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be drawn is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and drawn in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. An image in a low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses the data for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. All you have to do is transfer it to the frame buffer and store it. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by a drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among a plurality of display layers. As a result, images drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn for screen display without executing color blending for effects and without changing the color information of the image data. I can do it.

In this way, the VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using the image data stored in the predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK123 and the VRAM91AK147. Furthermore, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image to be drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. On the other hand, an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn in accordance with image data.

When a display list that does not include effect drawing commands but includes normal display drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute normal drawing synthesis processing that is different from effect drawing synthesis processing. In normal drawing synthesis processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the VRAM91AK147. The data may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, has the color information of the image data changed without executing color blending for effects. It can be drawn for screen display without having to do so.

FIG. 9-5 shows an example of execution of image processing using effect drawing and synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list including effect drawing commands, among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL3, the layer Image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL4 and image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL5 are each specified. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing and synthesis process, it stores them in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 and temporarily stores them. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5, Image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing and synthesis process. For example, when a color blend to be converted into monochrome is specified by command 01AKG04 as an effect drawing command, color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed in the layer 01AKL3 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

Thereafter, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes images corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, it is sufficient to overwrite the image data or erase hidden surfaces depending on the display priority. Among the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Let me remember it. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, and is written superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and is written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes images corresponding to the high priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, image data 01AKD02 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL2 among layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified first as the image data to be drawn. , image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads these image data, it writes and stores them in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out and written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 with color information changed by effect color blending, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 is given priority for display. are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the time. Thereafter, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing effect color blending. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn using a specific drawing process such as color blending for effects, and display various effects images such as a background image, a effects image showing a decorative pattern, and an effect image that increases chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, and are used to create effect images that indicate pending display or active display, and effect images that indicate small symbols, etc., for the progress of the game. Related predetermined images can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing effect drawing synthesis processing. .

FIG. 9-6(A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, a production image drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing etc. from the effect color blend is displayed. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed using monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., in which drawing is performed using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. Images for presentation can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without changing the color information included in the image data.

FIG. 9-6(B) shows image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, it is possible to display a production image drawn by difference calculation processing among effect color blends in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and rendering the value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as a specific drawing process, drawing is performed by a difference calculation process that converts the value of color information included in the image data and draws the image for presentation. can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without converting the values of color information included in the image data.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, as a specific drawing process, a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is performed. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, as a specific drawing process, the image data is It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are combined with image data by a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring by rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn with the included color information changed. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is converted by coordinate value conversion processing that changes the offset amount of the image position as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data through normal drawing processing.

By using these effect drawing commands, you can draw a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data, or a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. This makes it possible to perform different image processing depending on the effect drawing command, even for production images that are drawn using common image data, so that color information or position information can be changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the contents of the reach effect. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the ratio of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among the cases in which each reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effect that is a plurality of types of super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to differ depending on multiple types of reach effects by assigning a determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variable display pattern. All you have to do is stay there.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are super reach effects with lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also referred to as "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a super reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "Strong SP Reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. It is. Therefore, when the SP reach A1 reach effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" only about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach performance content may include a performance mode in which some commonality can be recognized. For example, for SP reach A1 to A3, a common moving image may be played back and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, a common character image may be displayed as an animation for SP reach A1 to A3. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode that makes it possible to recognize the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, for SP Reach B, a moving image different from that for SP Reach A1 to A3 may be played back and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP Reach B, a character image different from that in SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode in which one of SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized as different from other cases. For example, different moving images may be played back and displayed as background images for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, character images different from each other may be displayed as animations in SP reaches A1 to A3. Other presentation modes that can be used to recognize differences include arbitrary displays on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary displays using light emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. Any movement using a movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these may be used.

When a super reach effect such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a case where a drawing effect is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects that can display images drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if it includes a case where an effect is executed by displaying an image drawn only in response to a normal display drawing command without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of setting the drawing effect contents according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns, some or all of the drawing effect contents are different. The content of the drawing effect includes the presence or absence and type of the drawing effect by effect display, and the presence or absence of the drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also referred to as a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is also referred to as a specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a monochrome-converted effect image. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image with color information inverted. In this way, the effect display may be performed as long as it can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. Note that the effect display may be capable of displaying an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, for example, using command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands.

A strobe display is an effect display that alternately and repeatedly displays an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (for example, black or white) with settings different from the image data, every predetermined number of frames. It is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while strobe display can be executed within the range of images drawn on a specific layer, a limit may be set such that strobe display cannot be executed within the range of images drawn on a special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image has been temporarily stopped by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that when strobe display is not performed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, multiple drawings are performed at a rate according to the variable display result and the content of the reach effect as shown in FIG. 9-8. It is sufficient if one of the performance patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, depending on the variable display result and the content of the reach effect, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, if the variable display result is "Lose" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (=60/100). The rendering effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the rendering effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=5/100). /100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined, and at a rate of 5% (5/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined. be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the rate of 20% (=20/100) The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such determination ratios, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state is different between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing specific drawing effects using one or both of effect display and strobe display. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is more effective than when the variable display result is a "loss". The proportion of drawing performance patterns other than those determined is high. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect is executed, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, the content is higher than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In addition, the determination ratio of the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, only drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 cannot be determined. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, a super reach effect is executed which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize the super reach effect, which has a high probability of hitting the jackpot, and this may reduce the player's enjoyment of the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, a limit is set in which a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed from the player's attention to the reach performance of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game interest.

When the reach effect content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different ratios depending on the variable display result. . When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In this way, when the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing performance is executed and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases, so the super reach with low jackpot reliability Even if it is a reach effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect can increase the player's expectations and appropriately improve the interest in the game.

Note that even when the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing presentation pattern other than 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that specific drawing effects using effect display and strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. Restrictions may be set as follows.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. When the super reach variable display is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display until execution of the ready-to-win effect is started after the ready-to-win effect is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-reach performance execution period in which the super reach performance is executed until the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the end of the chance up performance execution period until the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed. The result notification performance may be any performance that notifies a performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in a reach performance that becomes a super reach. The performance execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows performance control example 02AKC01 in each performance execution period. Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. become executable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, so even in the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the super reach reach performance, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. For example, in the production execution period D0, if it is possible to perform a light emission production using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of decorative symbols starts. good. In addition, during the production execution period D0, decorative symbols may be stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and ” When the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous eye are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are activated in response to the BGM and sound effect output. It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. It may be possible to perform the performance.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which the super reach reach performance etc. are executed during the execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01 is selected. Regardless of whether this is the case, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. In the performance execution period D2 which is after the performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. In the specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, for example, in specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5. Note that even when a specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 is executed, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR is performed, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. becomes executable. In addition, in the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is other than 02AKA01. It may be. If the specific drawing effect SPE is made executable in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is changed to normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying the finalized decorative design etc. that is a variable display result. What is necessary is to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be made executable during all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of super reach will be executed as a determination result at the time of starting winning. You can do it like this. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, in the same way as when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2, for example, in the specific layer 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, It is only necessary that an image drawn by specific drawing processing can be displayed, and for example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emitting performance using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is performed. It is doable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the light emission effect is controlled not to be executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect may be prevented from being executed by turning off the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9. On the other hand, when a specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing is executed, a light emission effect by a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute the light emission effect by emitting light from the light emitting member, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is In the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying is executed, a restriction is set as a limit that the light emission performance by light emission of the light emitting member is not performed. When a specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, an appropriate image that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process is created. The display can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 etc., the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emission effect by light emission of the light emitting member, for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. Restrictions may be placed on the presentation mode of the light emission effect, such as reducing the amount of light emission effect compared to when the light emission effect is used. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, a restriction is applied to reduce the amount of effect by lowering the amount of light emitted from the light emitting member (brightness) in the light emitting effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the number of light-emitting members that can emit light in the light emission effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the luminous color used in the light emitting effect (for example, monochrome light emission) than when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Limits may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of execution of reach effects and drawing effects. FIGS. 9-10 shows an example of performance execution when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where a reach performance that becomes a super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an example of production execution 02AKM01 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is established. At this time, a reach is established when the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are all stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. , the normal reach reach effect is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be appropriately executed in response to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary that it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect outputs from reach establishment to super reach development.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in a case where the normal reach reach performance changes to the super reach reach performance in response to the start of the performance execution period D1. 9-10(C) and FIG. 9-10(D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the super reach reach performance progresses during the performance execution period D1. In the case of production execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, corresponding to the production execution period D1, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM05 when the chance-up performance during reach is executed in the performance execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows a performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach-for-win performance is executed after a chance-up performance in the performance execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification performance is executed during the performance execution period D3. At this time, as a super reach effect, a reach effect with different effect contents depending on the variable display result is executed, and also in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by oscillating display or the like. In the case of production execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the production execution period D3, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an example of performance execution 02AKM08 when the final notification of the variable display result is executed during the performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of super reach ends, the determined decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed. In the case of production execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the production execution period D4, it is possible to execute the normal drawing production NOR accompanied by the light emission production regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and to execute the specific drawing production SPE. Not executed.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE using strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM12 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of production execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM12, an effect display that becomes a pause display during strobe display is executed. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient if the pause display can be executed during strobe display by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of the VRAM91AK147, the same image as in the production execution example 02AKM11 may be temporarily stopped and repeatedly displayed.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM13, images similar to effect execution example 02AKM12 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(E) shows effect execution example 02AKM15 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM14, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM16 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM15, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows effect execution example 02AKM17 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM16, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM18 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM17, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform pause display as well as strobe display. . After the strobe display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the execution returns to the normal drawing effect NOR, and control is performed to execute the light emission effect.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a strobe display in response to a drawing command, the normal drawing effect NOR is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 9-12 (A) shows that when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02 AKB02 is executed. This shows a production execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM22 in which a strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similarly to performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows. In the case of production execution example 02AKM23, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance-up production during reach that was started in production execution example 02AKM21. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even when strobe display is executed, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM23, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-12(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25 in the case where, following performance execution example 02AKM24, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM27 in which a ready-to-win performance after the performance execution example 02AKM25 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following the performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or a temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM27, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, a monochrome-converted image drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect in addition to strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses a dedicated image using an image drawn with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of data. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect according to the effect drawing command, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and while preventing the amount of image data from increasing, the display effect It is possible to enhance the impression of the player and improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-13(A) shows a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect execution example 02AKM31 is shown. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM32 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-13 (C) is an example of performance execution in which, following performance execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the reach chance up effect. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when a strobe display is executed, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time. , the temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM33, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-13(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35 in which, following performance execution example 02AKM34, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. Compared to the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image rendered by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM36, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37 when a ready-to-win performance after performance execution example 02AKM35 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. Note that the temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or the temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM38, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, an image with inverted color information, which is drawn by converting color information values through differential calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to perform a strobe display and a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect.

The effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, uses dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the color information included in the image data in accordance with the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of the situation. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect in response to an effect drawing command, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impressions given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color changes in the displayed image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort due to the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than when it is SP reach B. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be increased and the game interest can be appropriately improved.

The invention regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features regarding the feature parts 01AK and 02AK, but may have the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may also include a part of it.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that becomes a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state, rather than when a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

The description has been made assuming that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emission effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the near side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a light-emitting member such as a light-guide plate LED is provided near the light-guide plate, and light from the light-emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light-guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light-guide plate. In this case, a light emitting display effect that displays a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. In the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing performance pattern, it is sufficient if the light emission display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display performance pattern. On the other hand, in response to a drawing effect pattern or the like, the light emitting display effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting section mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is only necessary that the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern, etc. during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern. On the other hand, the button light emission effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2, which displays and renders an effect image corresponding to a pending display or an active display, may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In the setting where layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the pending display or active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information etc. may be changed. When a specific drawing performance SPE using a monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is only necessary that the performance image corresponding to the pending display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While it is possible to display such monochrome display of pending display and active display, if it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of specific display related to variable display such as pending display and active display, specific drawing effect SPE If a change effect is executed during the execution of , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state. If the change performance includes a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change performance of the successful pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, When the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the pending display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like indicating the direction in which the game ball is launched can be displayed. For example, in the direction display layer, when a firing promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance for a left-handed performance or a right-handed performance, a performance image that urges the game ball to be fired towards the left side game area or the right side game area is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, games can be played by firing game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first route may be a right-handed route that becomes the right-hand game area in the gaming area, and the second route may be a left-handed area that becomes the left-hand game area in the game area. Then, when the first state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, a first promotion image that urges the game medium to be launched toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. That's fine. In addition, when the second state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image is displayed that urges the game medium to be launched toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, whereas the direction display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side game area or the right side game area may be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display images that prompt the firing of game media using normal rendering processing rather than specific rendering processing, a variety of display effects can be performed while ensuring appropriate visibility of the images that prompt the firing of gaming media. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that shows a changeable effect output amount, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect is drawn in a displayable manner.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that displays a warning image or the like to notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the warning display layer, detection is performed by various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big winning opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. If it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the state of detection of game balls by the start port switch, count switch, etc., a warning image will be drawn and displayed according to the error that has occurred. Good if possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the warning display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be displayed as a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality while providing a variety of display effects. By doing so, you can increase your enjoyment of the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormality light emission notification may be performed by causing the light emitting member to emit light even during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emission effect is executed. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be performed with higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that displays a presentation image in a setting suggestion presentation may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer only needs to be able to draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute or not to perform the performance depending on the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute setting suggestion performances with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the suggestion display layer is The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to display images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. It is possible to perform a variety of display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, during the performance execution period when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the special layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process, whereas the suggestion display layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by specific drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer using specific drawing processing, it is possible to diversify the display of images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result to the assist time (also referred to as AT), which is the executable notification period. As the navigation notification, an effect image that informs the stopping order in a recognizable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that displays an effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, if you want to notify the order in which to stop the variable display by each reel on the left center right, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image showing the order of stop operations using the stop switch on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing, whereas the notification display layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. The visibility of the image that informs the operation mode when stopping the variable display in a slot machine can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing. It is possible to improve the game's interest by performing various display performances while appropriately ensuring the following.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the following inventions. In other words, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can execute a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, an effect image can be displayed based on instructions from a display list. Techniques for making it possible to display images by tilting them, and techniques for gaming machines that draw processed images in which a plurality of deformed images generated using inverted images are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-29947, etc. was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there was a risk that the visibility of important images would be reduced because the entire image was changed. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment while ensuring appropriate image visibility.
The gaming machine related to the feature section 01AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. An image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to a normal display drawing command, which draws in accordance with image data, and At least, it is possible to perform specific drawing processing such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing processing that changes color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command. Images in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers such as layers AKL01 and AKL02 that have a higher priority than the specific layers, for example. With steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display an image for effect by drawing with a specific drawing process in a specific layer, and for example, with step 01AKS04, with a special layer, it is possible to draw with a normal drawing process and display images related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data (for example, color information inversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, there is a first period (for example, production execution period D1, etc.) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Among a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the performance execution period D2, etc.), the light emitting means may be allowed to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not be allowed to emit light during the second period. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, a first period (such as a performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as a performance execution period D1, and a second period (for example, a performance execution period D2) during which a specific drawing process is executed, such as a performance execution period D2. etc.), in the first period it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a normal mode, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. It is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, settings such as effects according to effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (for example, the effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and an image drawn by specific drawing processing may not be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. The system is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a performance using the performance execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and it may be possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process as an image displayed by the setting suggestion performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific rendering effect that temporarily stops and displays an image, such as a specific rendering effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochromatic image in a specific layer (for example, see effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a mode that is smaller than the identification information image, such as the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. It is possible to perform variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1), and for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process. Yes, the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. It is equipped with an image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and is equipped with a specific performance such as a super reach performance that suggests control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the performance patterns of the specific performance are a first pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, and a second pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state. Among the performance periods in which the specific performance is executed, at least during the first period, such as the performance execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing performance. It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to the drawing command of In the second period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, and to display a specific drawing process such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing performance, for example, in the case of the second pattern. It is possible to display images drawn by . As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, appropriately raise the player's expectations, and improve his/her interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may be performed by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information inversion, for example. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02 AKC01, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting means in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific effect, and in response to displaying an image drawn by a specific drawing process in a specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emitting effect may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific production, it is possible to execute a light emission production by the light emitting means in a normal mode, and in response to displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing in a specific production, The light emitting effect may be more limited than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. You may also choose not to display the image. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, and the setting means is provided. It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. It may also be possible to display images. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image in the case of the second pattern, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to variably display a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image.For example, as shown in Figure 9-5, the identification information image is The reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, in a configuration in which an operation performance to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion performance that is an operation performance in a suggestion performance mode, in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, or a character image using data regarding a common character image is added to the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. In a configuration in which images can be displayed using a specific layer, a special layer can be drawn using a specific drawing process to display an effect image, and a special layer with a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn using a normal drawing process. It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in a second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by specific drawing processing when the second pattern has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first pattern.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 having the feature section 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the feature part 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is assumed to be the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is assumed to be the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from the player located in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Furthermore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that supports and fixes the game board 2. (also referred to as underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has obstacle nails (not shown) on the front surface of the game board. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, etc. are provided, and a spacer member 201 is integrally attached to the back side of the board 200. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

An opening 2c is formed in the board 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side can be viewed from the player's side through the opening 2c. It can be viewed from the front side. Further, an area in the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board 200 is made visible through the board 200.

In addition, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the downstream area of the game ball in the game area Y. has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at a position below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided above the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right side position of the board 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided in which game balls flowing down the gaming area Y can win prizes.

The first production unit 300 and the fourth production unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, so that they can be seen through the board 200 from the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board board 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a BB sectional view of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts of (B) It is. Note that here, to aid understanding, the light-emitting region 506 is shown in dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 that is provided so as to be closed except for the right side and lower area of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51; An LED board 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted for inputting light into the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a condenser for condensing the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. Note that the light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate and has a predetermined front-to-back width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), as shown in FIG. 10-4. It is arranged in front of the third presentation unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

The light guide plate 501 also includes a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface. , a light-emitting region that emits light by light that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the halftone dot area in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and A non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, it does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. and a non-emissive region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial edge appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and directs it forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C), the light emitting region 506 has a fine unevenness state so that the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a is guided and emitted from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 is so small that it is difficult to see it with the naked eye. The surface is uneven.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see FIG. (See halftone area in 10-5). In other words, the light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region where a dot pattern is formed, and is a non-second region where a predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters inside from the right end surface 501a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface. The light emitting area 507 is an area where a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, designs, or patterns are also used. It may also be possible to display other display information.

Note that when the light guide plate 501 is in a state where no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting area 506 is in a colorless and transparent state, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the The second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, a portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but a portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed on a light guide plate by a stamper or injection. 501 may be constructed using a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface (rear surface). In addition, the reflective section can be constructed using a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, or a groove processing method. It's okay.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed of a light-transmitting member such as acrylic or polycarbonate into a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction. On the surface of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condensing lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. One convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Furthermore, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. May be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Furthermore, the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is approximately the same as the front-rear width of the light-receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. The light is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condensing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condensing lens 504 is formed from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat slope that gradually slopes forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape whose thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the distance between the gaps is large enough to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from coming into contact even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be explained. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has high directivity, it is incident on the condenser lens 504. The light is radially diffused in the left-right direction within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted toward the right and exits.

Thereby, even if the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area in the light guide plate 501 is It becomes possible to expand. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be caused to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is repeatedly totally reflected in the front and rear direction, and is condensed toward the approximately central position in the front and rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the condenser lens 504 The light is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-to-back width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light guide plate does not diffuse the light from the light guide plate LED 502 in the front-to-back direction. 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (the player's side) at the light emitting region 506. As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, so that the area represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 on the front surface of the light guide plate 501 emits surface light. The shape will now be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player (in the front-back direction), the image display device 5 is placed at the back, and the light guide plate device 500 is placed at the front. When viewed from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. In FIGS. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit viewed diagonally from the front. In Figure 10-9, (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first production unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. It is mainly composed of a cover member 302, which is attached to the base member 302, and an LED board 303, which is attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so that it can be visually recognized through the glass window 50a and the board 200.

The base member 301 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat part 311 made of a flat surface, a recessed part 312 formed at the lower part of the flat part 311 and having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear wall part 313A located slightly behind the flat part 311. 313D.

On the upper part of the flat part 311, a plurality of trapezoidal convex parts 314A to 314E, which form part of a decorative pattern 331 to be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. Note that the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). Furthermore, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED board 303, and is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat part 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 (to be described later) is located in front of the flat part 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 that can emit light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown). At the same time, a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the other hand, on the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown) are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of the flat portion 311 and the recessed portion 312 of the base member 301; It mainly has second light-transmitting parts 322A and 322B corresponding to the first performance LED 304. Furthermore, a plurality of trapezoidal protrusions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the protrusions 314A to 314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second transparent parts 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first transparent part 321, and a recessed part 322D is formed on the back surface. It is possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusing part 322C consisting of a fine uneven part is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting part 322A, 322B, and can diffuse the light from the first LED 304 for effect at the rear and emit it forward. ing. Note that the uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first light-transmitting portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, and decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and diagonally to the right. It has a decorative part 331D and a decorative part 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative parts 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided. .

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A to 331E can be formed by, for example, performing sandblasting on the back (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or pasting a translucent sticker or the like. As a result, each of the decorative parts 331A to 331E appears milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), an LED board 303 as an electronic component having a first presentation LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with a cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, it is not possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by disposing the same black base member 301 around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are It is difficult to see the boundary between BD and BD. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED board The cover member 302 is placed in a high position so as to cover the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first transparent section 321. It is difficult for the first performance LED 304 to be visually recognized from the player side through the second light-transmitting portions 322A, 322B. In addition, by placing the milky white or translucent decorative parts 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) is selected from among the plurality of decorative patterns 331. ) is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative parts 331B and 331C made of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is arranged between two members (LED By being provided across the board 303 and cover member 302), one decorative pattern 331 looks as if it is provided on one member, so that the LED board 303 and cover member 302 on the back side It becomes difficult to recognize that they are separate members.

In addition, a portion of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 becomes difficult to see from the player side due to the overlapping decorative parts 331B and 331C on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Note that since the decorative parts 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the boundary part BD, the overlapping area with the boundary part BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 overlaps the LED board 303 and the cover. By being formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

In addition, the decorative part 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary part BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish because the aspect is similar to the boundary part BD. If the LED board 303 is milky white and has a brightness higher than black, it will be noticeable, and the LED board 303 will be less noticeable. Note that by arranging the decorative portions 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side by the decorative portions 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the wiring pattern 320 and the wiring pattern 320 are similar (or common), it becomes difficult to tell them apart, so that the LED board 303 becomes difficult to stand out.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E are different in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and larger in area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, so they are more noticeable than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped with the front side of the printed wiring 320, making it difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, thereby making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flat hexagonal linear convex portions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) in aspect to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the aspect is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the area of the base member 301 that is not covered with the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas that can be viewed from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302. By providing the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern 331, it becomes difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED board 303 is disposed in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED board 303 is positioned below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, in a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. By providing this, it is located away from the image display device 5, which is the focus of the player's attention, so that it is less noticeable.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is connected to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By straddling the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, it becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303, which would normally not be visible to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side, where they can be seen by the player, increasing the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly explained based on FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A).

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are configured as an integrated unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the lower left. In between, there is a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball P) that can enter the second starting winning hole of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which players P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 is provided with a plurality of performance LEDs 704 that can emit light forward.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A, 705B can be visually recognized from the player side through the cover plate 702A.

(First production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first production unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIGS. 10-16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side below the image display device 5, and when viewed from the player's side, The right end of the one performance unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front part of the variable winning ball unit 700 is placed on the front side of the board 200, while the first production unit 300 is located on the front side of the board 200. It is located on the back side of the.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first transparent part 321 of the first presentation unit 300, is the second transparent part 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 (L1A>L1B).

In the first transparent part 321 of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the first transparent part 321, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is XA %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A, 322B of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A, 322B, light is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first transparent section 321 and the second transparent sections 322A, 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some light may be reflected at the front. , is emitted at the rear in a direction different from the T direction (so that it spreads out to the surroundings). In particular, the second light transmitting parts 322A and 322B have a light diffusing part 322C made of uneven parts formed on the back surface, so that light can more easily transmit in a direction different from the T direction than the first light transmitting part 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (light transmittance is low; XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light that enters from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light-transmitting part 321 and the second light-transmitting parts 322A, 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and difficult to be diffused to the surroundings before being emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second light transmitting part 322A, 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, since the light transmittance of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover plate 702A (for example, When viewing a predetermined portion (for example, the first performance LED 304 or LED board 303) on the back side of the cover member 302 from the player side through the cover member 302, than when viewing the ball P). Since the visibility is low, the LED board 303 including the first presentation LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first effect unit 300 has the same color (black) as the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around it. , the LED board 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front and rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front and rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first production unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first production unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the player can see through the cover member 702. Since the visibility when viewing the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when viewing the game ball P, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first production unit 300 Compared to this, the LED board 303 placed on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a light-transmitting member, appears to be more difficult to see. Further, since the cover member 302 is placed closer to the back side than the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are dark black, the LED board 303 becomes more inconspicuous.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member disposed around it, are of the same color (black), but the present invention The electronic component and the specific member do not have to be of the same color; for example, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color or similar color.

Colors have three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness and saturation) and are adjacent in hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in Figure 10-16. To explain based on this, when the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a predetermined number (here, 24 colors), Each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C), When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second presentation unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second presentation unit with the cover member removed. 10-18, (A) is a GG sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a HH sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. It mainly consists of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403.As shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and circumferential surface) are white.

The LED board 403 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403. Further, on the back side of the LED board 403, there are a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C that can emit light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D that can emit light downward, and other electronic components (not shown). ) are installed. The second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. Further, the surface of the LED board 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED board 403, and includes a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED board 403; It is arranged between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED board 403, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404B is The light is made incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back side of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406. The light is emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) in which a cross-sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, the inner lens 405 is constructed using a molding method in which uneven parts are created on the back surface of the inner lens 405 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may be constructed by an adhesive dot method in which a dot-shaped adhesive material is attached to the plate, a groove processing method, or the like.

The cover member 402 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a convex portion 410 having a shape that is a slightly enlarged version of the LED board 403 when viewed from the front is provided to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having a translucent property, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Furthermore, a light diffusing section 402A consisting of a concave and convex section is formed on the back surface of the convex section 410, so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In an area above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421A protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second presentation LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421B protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second presentation LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusing portion made of an uneven portion may also be formed in a portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding stripes 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined rearward upwardly and downwardly from the convex portion 410.

The plurality of protrusions 421A, 421B have uneven parts continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped part 421C is formed at a midway position in the longitudinal direction, and extends upward and downward from the protrusion 410. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second presentation LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these uneven parts and the stepped part 421C, and also The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405, and the light is emitted from the convex portion of the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered with a cover member 402. Covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusing portion is formed in the cover member 402 at a portion other than the protruding stripes 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the parts other than the protrusions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by disposing the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED board 403, the LED board 403 is connected to the surrounding base member 401. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 forms the boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and lower side of the portion BD. In other words, a part of the decorative part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD, so that a part of the boundary part BD is covered by the decorative part 420. By becoming less visible, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where the player can see them, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

Further, the decoration part 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary part BD is larger than that of the decoration pattern 331 described above, and by making the boundary part BD difficult to see, the LED board 403 It makes it less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decoration part 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and a part of the lower side of the boundary part BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so that it may overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary part BD.

Furthermore, since the letter “V” is displayed as a logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and become aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is applied as a logo type is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”, characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a jackpot such as “heat”, “fierce heat”, and “!!”, characters such as the model name of a game machine, a title, the name of a character appearing, etc. may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means that can cause the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the player can see the LED board 403 because the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emitted light. Since it becomes difficult to notice the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion consisting of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 In the case where a plurality of decorative parts 420 are provided in a region of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative parts (for example, a pattern, etc.) different in form from the decorative part 420 are provided in a region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorative parts It is preferable that the number of decorative parts is larger than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative parts and the plurality of predetermined decorative parts are different in form; for example, the predetermined decorative part may be an enlarged form or a reduced form of the decorative part, or the external shape, shape, Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

The cover member 402 also includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see through the convex part 410 from the player, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20, (A) is a front view showing the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. 10-21, (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing a presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. FIGS. 10-26 are schematic front views showing (A) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A), and 10-26, the third presentation unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member disposed to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. ) and the performance motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source that allows movement in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 10-26(B) and the performance position shown in FIG. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting production section 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, In other words, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that projects from the front periphery of the base member 601 . On the front surface of the LED board 603, a plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The third performance LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. Further, the surface of the LED board 603 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Note that the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the production control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed to have almost the same shape as the LED board 603, and allows the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED board 603 to be viewed from the front side. It is arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with lights for diffusing and emitting the light from the third display LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side toward the front. The provision of a light diffusing section 605A consisting of a concavo-convex portion allows surface light to be emitted.

The cover member 602 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint that has a translucent property, or a translucent sheet with letters printed thereon is attached. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Further, a light diffusion section 602A consisting of a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602, and can diffuse the light from the inner lens 605 and emit it forward.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the characters "XXX" indicating a jackpot are applied as a logo type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and It may be characters such as the name of a character, characters indicating a variable display result such as "Jackpot", "BONUS", or "RUSH", or characters suggesting a jackpot such as "Heat", "Very Hot", or "!!". Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B to the front through the inner lens 605 is further transmitted to the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to section 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, the letters "XXX" Since the periphery of the characters is illuminated, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission production section 630, is rotatably supported on a rotation axis with one end facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. The power transmission member of the arm member provided with the production section 630 can be changed in various ways, and may be a rack gear, a pinion gear, etc. as long as it can transmit power so that the light emission production section 630 can be moved in the vertical direction. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the fourth presentation unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 disposed to cover the front side of the base member 801, and a base member 802. It mainly consists of an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the LED board 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and as shown in FIG. At the upper left corner, it is provided so that it can be viewed through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a portion of the periphery is formed into an arc shape along the guide rail 211 . Furthermore, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller in front view than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. On the front surface of the LED board 803, a plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The fourth presentation LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in plural along the peripheral edge of the front surface of the LED board 803. Further, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is placed in an area surrounded by the plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED board 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back side of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting the light forward. The light is emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 among the standing walls erected on the front periphery of the base member 801, and covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the part along the guide rail 211. Covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing section 802A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth production unit 800, when the fourth production LED 804 emits light, the light emitted from the fourth production LED 804 forward through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have the surfaces of their respective base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 of the same color, which is white, and these base members 601, 801 and the front sides of the LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are lit. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered with a cover. Covered by member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 602 is formed with the light diffusing section 602A, the cover member 602 cannot be seen from the player's side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, an inner lens 605 with a light diffusing section 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), a standing wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (around) the white LED board 603, so that the LED board 603 is connected to the surrounding base member. 601, the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602 is difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), an LED board 803 as an electronic component having a fourth presentation LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 802 is formed with the light diffusing section 802A, the cover member 802 cannot be seen from the player's side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED board 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by disposing the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED board 803, the LED board 803 is connected to the surrounding base member 801. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angle-type LED that enters light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the LED including the fourth performance LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which a reflecting portion and a light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the player The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the player side is the same as the visibility of the LED board 803 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. The visibility is higher than that of 603. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), furthermore, the arrangement position in the front-rear direction of the front surface is further forward (on the player side) than the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth production unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and furthermore, The light emitting mode by the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface emission, whereas the light emission mode by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). In addition, in FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting production unit 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is located closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the performance means has higher visibility than the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player side. That is, the third production unit 600, which is a production means with higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth production unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth production unit 800. Since the third presentation unit 600 is more conspicuous than the fourth presentation unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth presentation unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is located closer to the player. , the form is illustrated in which it is configured as a presentation means with higher visibility than the LED board 803 and the base member 801 by emitting strong light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third presentation The light emitting production section 630 of the unit 600 has improved visibility because it differs from the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 in at least one of the size, position relative to the player, and light emission mode when viewed from the player side. It is good if the value is high.

Furthermore, the front surface of the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 as a production means may be colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, or a decorative section with a color that is highly visible may be provided. The cover member 602 may be molded in a highly visible color to easily increase the visibility of the light emitting production section 630. Furthermore, the visibility of the light emitting effect part 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 which can emit light by a light emitting means and can be operated by a production motor 631 is applied as a production means, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a light-emitting means (such as a lamp part) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or a effect means that does not emit light by a light-emitting means, or a light-emitting means provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3. It may be a production section that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed at the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, which protrudes further forward than the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the gaming area Y so as not to obstruct the visibility of the game ball passing through the upper part of the gaming area Y, but by protruding largely forward, it can be used for pachinko, for example. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game hall, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game hall being blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, by providing the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 at a position corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603, 803, there is provided a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player side than the LED boards 603, 803, and the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A and become less noticeable.

Further, although the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 are white in color, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be dark colored (for example, black). By doing so, the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

Note that in this embodiment, a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player above the LED boards 603, 803 is applied as the protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific members. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion provided protrudingly from a part of the frame 3 for the game machine. It may be configured by other gaming devices (for example, winning ball device, etc.) or presentation devices provided in the area Y. In addition, the protruding part 3A is not only fixedly installed on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the protruding part 3A can be positioned above the electronic components and specific members. It may be a protrusion that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting area 506 when the light emitting part 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

More specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light enters the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 becomes in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting production section 630, and the power transmission member 632 are visible from the player's side to the light guide plate. 501 and becomes difficult or impossible to see. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the light guide plate LED 502 to control the light emitting area during a movement period in which the light emission performance section 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position or during a performance period in which they are located at the performance position. 506, the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see through the light guide plate 501 from the player's side. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) etc. provided along the member 632 from becoming conspicuous.

Furthermore, after the light emitting production section 630 moves to the production position, when the light guide plate LED 502 goes out and the light emitting production of the light emitting area 506 ends, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting production section By lighting up the third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission presentation section 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made less noticeable.

Additionally, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) that are operable in this way are visible to the player during the waiting period and movement period when they are waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or impossible to see from the player's side at least during the performance period when the player is located at the performance position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the electronic components from becoming conspicuous during the production period that attracts the attention of the players.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the feature section 75SG of this embodiment has the following features:
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
In this way, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
Note that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color (for example, black on black, white on white, etc.).

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 75SG)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, second performance LEDs 404A to 404D, third performance LEDs 604A and 604B, and fourth performance LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. (including the control board 12, relay board, etc.), electronic parts such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component is applied as a specific member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member that constitutes a part of a unit (device) that arranges or houses an electronic component as described above, it may be a member that is provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member forming part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3). (a member constituting a part, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 forming part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or housed are applied as the light-transmitting member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the member does not constitute a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If a member is provided so that a player can see through the electronic component and the specific member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, It may be a member that constitutes a part of another unit, a member that constitutes a part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to the same color.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and , the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and electronic components and specific members are arranged from the player's side. When viewed visually, they may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping. Additionally, if the specific component is visible and placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player's side, the electronic component and the specific component are placed apart in the vertical, horizontal, front-back, etc. directions. may have been done.

Note that the specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position that is visible from the player's side together with the electronic component, for example, a specific member located within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. It may also include specific members.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency are applied as the translucent members, but the present invention applies thereto. The material is not limited to any particular material as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the electronic component and the specific member can be seen through the member by the player, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members allow the player to pass through the cover members 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although a form in which a part or the entire area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member is visible is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component If the electronic component and the specific component are provided so as to be visible through the electronic component, the electronic component and the specific component can be visually recognized together even if at least a part of the specific component is not visible through the component. All you have to do is stay there.

Moreover, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members, the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base member 301 as a specific member, 401, 601, 801 are arranged along the electronic components and the specific member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific member. It doesn't have to be done. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the light-transmitting member.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the entire surface of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 is colored in a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of the parts of the electronic components and specific members that are visible through the transparent member (for example, the front color of the electronic components and the specific member) are similar colors. The entire surface does not necessarily have to be of similar color. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored when the components are molded, colored by painting or printing after molding, or colored by pasting a sticker etc. to a predetermined color. You can leave it there.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined electronic device that is difficult or invisible to the player and is installed separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component. parts (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic components. (a member for fixing the starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.), the predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) , it is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member that fixes the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, with respect to predetermined electronic components such as the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and solenoids 81 and 82, which are provided in a manner that is difficult or invisible to the player, the balance with the predetermined member that fixes these components is determined. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering the above, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, by setting the color of the specific component to a color that has the same hue as the electronic component and has either higher brightness or saturation, the visibility of the specific component will be higher than that of the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively less noticeable.

Furthermore, by coloring the light-transmitting member in a similar color to the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, thereby making the electronic component less noticeable.

Further, for example, in a case where electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, an electronic component such as a black LED board may be installed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side with the image display device 5 in between. By providing an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color as the electronic component separately from the specific component so as to be visible to the player, the black component can be arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member of the same color or similar color as the electronic component at a separate position from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic parts 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed on the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic part 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the electronic components of the second presentation unit 400, the third presentation unit 600, and the fourth presentation unit 800 become less noticeable, so that the above-mentioned presentation can be presented suitably.

Specifically, for example, as explained in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 etc. In the case of controlling the electronic parts (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (for example, the game effect lamp 9 It may also be possible to control the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer than the game effect lamp 9 (or to make the light amount lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing this, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, thereby preventing electronic components and specific components from becoming more noticeable. can.

Also, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic components and the specific member, the second effect is capable of surface-emitting the decorative portion 420 of the transparent member disposed on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member. For light-emitting members such as the LED 404A that are not noticeable even if they continue to emit light, the light amount may be maintained (not restricted in execution) even when controlling not to perform a light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members less noticeable without reducing the presentation effect too much.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of game balls is Rental balls that are circulated inside the gaming machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the numbers are subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. A gaming machine 75SG001), which includes an electronic component (for example, an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803) that is provided so as to be visible to the player, and an electronic component that is provided around the electronic component and has a color similar to that of the electronic component. A specific member formed (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801), and a member having translucency so that the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized by the player through the member. a transparent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802), a display means (e.g., image display device 5), a group effect (e.g., displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group); , a group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 47, the 6-person group effect shown in FIGS. 94 to 100), 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed to span the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301) (FIG. 10-12). ), the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301), and the display period of the image in the group presentation is The first display period includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59), and the first display period starts after the display of the first character in the group effect starts. , is a period from when a new character is displayed until the display of any character ends for the first time (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)), and the second display period is , is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, from FIG. 97(a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)), the third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)). a37) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a42)), in the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, the part of the first displayed character changes. An example is a gaming machine that is displayed more than the first situation and enters a second situation in which a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94).

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, since the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, they are less noticeable. In addition, it is possible to execute group effects more suitably.

In other words, it is possible to create a gaming machine with a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design. In a second display period that is longer than the first display period, after a second situation in which a part of the character displayed is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed, , a new character is displayed, and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end, so by eliminating the situation where only a single character is displayed, it is ensured to the player that it is a group performance. The start and continuation of the group performance can be suitably executed and the interest of the group performance can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming parlor and easily attracts players' interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and can execute group effects more appropriately, it is possible to A game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a group effect (for example, a group preview) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. The display period of the image in the group effect is a first display period. , a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59), and the first display period includes the start of the display of the first character in the group presentation, and the start of the display of the new character. 94 (a23) to 96 (a30)). This is a period that is longer than the display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, Fig. 97 (a31) to Fig. 98 (a36)). (the period shown in FIG. 99(a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)), in the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, to a first situation in which the part of the first displayed character is displayed in the first situation. An example of this is a gaming machine in which a part of the character displayed second is displayed (eg, examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

[Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.]
11 and 12 are front views of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIGS. 11 and 12 show an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

It should be noted that two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolling display or (updated display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumu-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Yumu-chan is the main character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Further, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan that appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumu-chan is the main character, she has the highest degree of importance among all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters, including Jam-chan. Furthermore, Jam-chan has the highest degree of importance among the characters other than Yumu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumu-chan. Also, characters with higher priority than other characters, such as Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, are the characters that appear first, the characters that are placed in the most prominent position, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent position in the character selection scene, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent position in the character selection scene, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent positions It may be the highest ranked character among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 18). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 11, three locations on the lower left of the gaming area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), the game board 2 is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiver member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 18), and a big winning hole (as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state) by the big winning hole door. (hereinafter referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1, and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 13) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A big winning opening door is provided in the space between, and by sliding open and closing horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, the regular big winning opening with game balls is opened. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 18), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters a normal big prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 18), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the V large winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 18) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 11) that operates according to the performance. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member labeled with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member labeled with the letter "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime, the name of a singer, etc.). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "Yumemu-chan", the main character). ``Dreams'') may also be shown. In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11 and a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. . Specifically, of the movable body 32, among the members labeled with the characters "POWERFUL" and the members labeled with the characters "2", only the members labeled with the characters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 112, it stops at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Note that the movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 18).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 18).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the special pattern LED board 9020, the type of special pattern (first special pattern) in the first special pattern game and the special pattern in the second special pattern game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 15(a), which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, number of reserved memories, right hit display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by combinations of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 15(b), which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9053, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 9054.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board top lamp provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V grand prize opening are opened and the V winning is made. A V lamp 9G that notifies you that you are in a round of a possible jackpot game state or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and an electric chew lamp 9H provided on the stick controller 31A. the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right lamp provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. and a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member included in the movable body 32 and labeled with the word "POWERFUL" is divided into four parts, and the accessory lamp 9A1 is on the back side of the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is on the back side of the "P" and "O" parts. The accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A4 is placed on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) on the back side of the member labeled with the word "POWERFUL", so that "POWERFUL" lights up (emits light).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 depict the main character. are placed on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 where is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn starts to light up (light up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 12, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, divided into three areas: left, middle, and right. has been done. The parts of the game board 2 where the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are provided are made of a transparent material that can transmit light. When 9C1 to 9C13 light up (light up) on the back side of the upper part of the game board 2, the upper part of the game board 2 lights up (lights up) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn. As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights out) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), the stick controller 31A lights up (emits light). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when turned on (emits light), the push button 31B is turned on (emits light).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 14) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The left side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 14) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The right side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). Note that the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chew lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, The frame right lamp 9R is also collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 13 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 18).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 18) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps including left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L illuminates the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps including left frame lamps 9R2 to 9L12 running clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R illuminates the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the special pattern LED board 9020 and the fourth pattern unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the special figure LED board 9020 includes a special figure 1 variable display part 9021 that shows a variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows a variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 memory display section 9023 indicating the first pending memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section 9024 indicating the second pending memory number corresponding to the second special figure game. , a normal pattern memory display section 9025 that shows the number of stored normal symbols, a normal pattern display section 9026 that shows a variable display of normal symbols, a right hitting display section 9030 that prompts the player to play right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. , a time saving display section 9029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 9027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 9020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is encouraged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and also lights up the right-handed display section 9030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , sends a right-handed hit display light-off designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed hit display section 9030. Note that if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right-hitting display section 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 9030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during this time, the right-handed display section 9030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and 2 special figure 2 memory display section 9052 indicating the number of reserved memories, special figure 1 variable display section 9053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. This game includes a special figure 2 variable display section 9054 that shows , and a right-handed display section 9055 that prompts the player to play right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being variably displayed, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 9053. Also called. In addition, it is also referred to as the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display) that the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9054. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up), prompting the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display section 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and displays the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 9055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 16 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be seen. .

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J is displayed which indicates that the special symbol is being variably displayed and indicates the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged vertically. Moreover, the small pattern 5M is a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 17, a decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. It is located. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the screen of the image display device 5 has a rectangular or substantially rectangular shape, but as described above, the game board 2 has a cover on the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed in a way that it covers it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part of the screen (particularly the edge) of the image display device 5 is not visible or is difficult to see due to the gaming board 2. It has become.

[Substrate configuration]
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 18, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishment (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows. When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started by the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 9020.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game is started by the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020. is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 is a predetermined special pattern (small winning pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern. ), a "small win" occurs when a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved. In addition, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 may be different from the jackpot pattern or the small winning pattern (loss pattern). When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the symbols) is achieved, it becomes a "lose". In addition, in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020, a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern or the small winning pattern The lighting mode corresponding to the symbol (symbol) is also referred to as a "loss display result".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. Note that it is not necessary to provide a small win as the win type.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by either the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). It will continue until the earliest possible time. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, a jackpot type is set for "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning game state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot playing state for some jackpot types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. Note that the presentation is performed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc. The effect may be performed by turning off the lights, moving the movable body 32, or using any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach, super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than super reach. Moreover, even within super reach, it is divided into the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived during the normal reach. Furthermore, the jackpot reliability is higher if the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than if the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Moreover, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived at the strongest reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived at the latter half of the super reach. Note that, hereinafter, the "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach," the "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "SP first half," and the "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "SP second half."

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "jackpot" (the above-mentioned specific display result), a predetermined display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols. A determined decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "small win", a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5. A fixed decorative pattern (for example, "1 3 5", etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, there are times when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot types in a jackpot gaming state similar to the small winning gaming state) and when it becomes a "small winning". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will not be the reach mode, but the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be changed. As a display result, a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also referred to as a "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns may become a "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, during the small winning game state, and in some jackpot types (a jackpot type in a jackpot gaming state in the same manner as the small winning gaming state, for example, a jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high certainty state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Various tables regarding jackpots]
Various tables related to jackpots will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20.

(Win type)
FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the winning types. As shown in FIG. 19, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings in the jackpot ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 7th round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(each random number)
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 20, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. Random 1, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 65536, and then is updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining a post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to a post-variation among the variation patterns. The later variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the special symbol. Note that Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a loss.For example, it is updated by 1, and then added and updated from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to the winning time, and for example, is incremented and updated from 1 to 239, which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The front fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Random 5, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches the upper limit of 251, and then is updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 201, and then is updated again from 1.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) whether or not the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous state for the player. Then, out of the plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot is to be determined is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

In addition, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random numbers for determining the post-variation pattern (Random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (Random 5). be done. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 21(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 21(a), and in the probability change jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 21(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variable jackpot). Note that FIG. 21(a) shows the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot or the probability (proportion) of losing.

FIGS. 21(b) and 21(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 21(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 21(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(b) contains numerical values that are compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination, and correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(b), for the first special drawing, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values out of 1 are assigned, probability variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values. random 2 values are assigned, probability variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s. is assigned a value of

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 2 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Production control command]
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 22 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a previous variation (previous variation pattern) among variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation in the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the performance control CPU 101 receives the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 84XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a later variation (later variation pattern) among the variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The after variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns, there is a post-fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each post-fluctuation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variable jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variable jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the loss specification command, the normal jackpot 1 and 2 specification commands, and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 9 specification commands, or these collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start specification commands 1 to 11 or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 23 to 29.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a previous variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the previous variation, and a subsequent variation pattern, which corresponds to the subsequent variation, and the combination has different contents. It is now included. Note that the previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX(H)) explained using FIG. 22, and the after variation pattern corresponds to the after variation pattern command (84XX(H)) explained using FIG. corresponds to

(Main side pre-fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of previous variation patterns each assigned a previous variation number, the previous variation number 1 is a previous variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern for 13 seconds). It is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003(H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory item x) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate although it is in a reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004(H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory object ○) (a reach in which the movable body 32 operates in a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach in a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object x) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ◯) is to be executed after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ×) is executed after performing the pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ○) is to be executed after performing a pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the previous variation patterns, and an animation (moving picture) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes approximately 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1246. Furthermore, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1861.

(Main side post-variation pattern)
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns to which post-fluctuation numbers are assigned, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo continuous sequence. Pseudo-sequence is a performance that pretends to execute a pseudo-sequence but ends up not executing the pseudo-sequence.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies normal reach (win) (variation of decorative symbols that becomes a reach mode and becomes a win mode). Post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the second half of SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies the final reach (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode at the final reach).

(Determination of post-change pattern)
The post-change pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a loss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. As shown in FIG. 25, if the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 3 described in FIG. 20. Furthermore, if it is determined that the jackpot is a loss in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and the determined post-variation number also differs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(a), if the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-change patterns from post-change numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-fluctuation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is three, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-variation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and furthermore, the post-fluctuation number is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 26, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 4 explained in FIG. 20. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(a), if it is determined to be a normal jackpot 1 or 2, a definite variable jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8, then any one of the post variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. Post-fluctuation patterns are determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When it is determined to be either a probability change jackpot 3 or 9, one of the after fluctuation patterns is determined from among the after fluctuation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the after fluctuation patterns. . Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot is determined to be 4, one of the later variation patterns is determined from among the later variation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the later variation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 25, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 in the case of a loss, whereas in the case of a jackpot Since the time is higher than that, approximately 1/1.1, it is possible for the player to expect that a jackpot will occur if the SP reach or final reach develops.

(Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the pre-variation number to be determined also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(a), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 1 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 2 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(c), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(d), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 4 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 27(e), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(f), if any one of the post variation patterns with post variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the pre variation numbers 4, 7, and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(g), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 7 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 27(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(i), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 8 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

(Total fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as explained in FIGS. 25 to 27, one of the variation patterns with main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 28 will be obtained.

FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub side, variation patterns of sub variation numbers 1 to 26 are determined to correspond to the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1 to 26, respectively.

[Each preview performance]
FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table in each preview performance. In the present embodiment, a preview performance suggesting that the display result of the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The preview performance is also a performance that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a jackpot, or a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. The preview performance includes a group preview performance (also referred to as a group preview or group performance) and an SP first half title preview performance (also referred to as an SP first half title preview).

The group preview performance is a performance that displays an image in which a plurality of objects advance as a group. The plurality of objects include anything that moves, such as characters such as people, fish, and animals, and machines such as airplanes and cars. There may be one type of object such as a character, or there may be multiple types. A pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of group preview presentations. Specifically, there is a six-person group preview in which six characters dressed as maids advance as a group, a Bakchu group preview in which a rat character with the body of a bomb named Bakuchu advances in a group, A Boingo group preview in which characters named Boingo move together as a group may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the group preview performance is determined whether or not it is executed in the group preview lottery when the after fluctuation number 6 to 8 or 10 to 12 is determined to be the after fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach or final reach. and the type of group preview effect to be executed.

FIG. 30(a) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery in stage A. In this embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same variation pattern, multiple types of stages are provided that have different production modes (background images, BGM, sound effects, appearing characters, etc.). . Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, stage A is a stage where a character named Yumu-chan, one of the six characters dressed as maids, performs.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), if the post-variation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be a post-variation pattern with post-variation numbers 6 to 8, a group preview effect will be executed with a probability of 15%, and among these, a probability of 6-8 will be executed with a probability of 13%. It will be decided to be a group of people's notice, and there is a 2% probability that it will be decided to be a group of Boingo's notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, a group preview effect will be executed with an 85% probability, of which a 6 person group notice will be executed with a 55% probability, and a 30% It is decided that the Boingo group will be announced with a probability of .

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320, and the probability of being determined to the after variation pattern of after variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, when the probability of losing variation number 6 to 8 is about 1/102, The probability of being determined as a post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/320, and the probability of being determined to the after fluctuation pattern of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/1.1, it is assumed that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/1.1. The probability of determining the post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 85%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is about 64%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 64%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

FIG. 30(b) shows a lottery table for executing the group preview lottery in stage B. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, stage B is a stage where a performance is performed by a character named Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), if the post-variation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be a post-variation pattern with post-variation numbers 6 to 8, a group preview effect will be executed with a 10% probability, and an explosion will occur with an 8% probability. It will be decided to be a Chu group notice, and with a 2% probability it will be decided to be a Boingo group notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, there is a 90% probability that a group preview performance will be executed, and among these, there will be a 60% probability that it will be determined to be a Bakuchu group notice, and 30 % probability that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 90%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is about 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 74%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

The SP first half title preview is an effect that suggests a jackpot based on the display mode of the character image indicating the first half title of SP reach when it develops into SP reach. In this embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both stage A and stage B, but the preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is performed in stage B. Executed only on Note that even in the case of stage A, a preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the first half of the SP title may be executed.

In this embodiment, when the SP first half title preview is determined to be a post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach, it is determined whether or not it is executed in the SP first half title preview lottery. , and the type of SP first half title preview to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 30(c), if the after fluctuation pattern is determined to be the after fluctuation number 6 to 8 corresponding to a loss, the SP first half title preview will be executed with a 20% probability, and the after fluctuation number corresponding to a win will be executed. If the variation pattern after 10 to 12 is determined, the SP first half title preview will be executed with a probability of 80%.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is about 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is approximately 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed at the time of winning is approximately 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the SP first half title preview is executed is approximately 56%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the SP first half title preview is not limited to 56%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot when it is executed.

In this way, the reliability (expectation level of jackpot) in the group preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (in the case of jackpot) in the SP first half title preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B). Expectation level) was 56%, and group previews have higher reliability than SP first half title previews. Therefore, when the group preview is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title preview is executed, and the player is more likely to see the group preview being executed than the SP first half title preview. We have come to expect that.

In addition, the Boingo group notice in Stage A is only executed with a 2% probability when there is a loss, but it is executed with a 30% probability when there is a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed, , there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in Stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when it is a loss, but is executed with a 55% probability when it is a win, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it will not be a loss. The possibility of this is greater than the Boingo group prediction. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is more likely to experience the Boingo group notice than when the 6-person group notice is executed. We have come to expect that.

Similarly, the Boingo group notice in Stage B is executed with a probability of only 2% in the case of a loss, but is executed with a probability of 30% in the case of a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed. is most likely a jackpot. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with an 8% probability when it is a loss, but with a 60% probability when it is a win, so the Bakuchu group notice is executed. There is a greater possibility that this will be a failure than the Boingo group preview. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Bakuchu group notice is executed, and the player feels that the Boingo group notice is executed more than the Bakuchu group notice. We have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the six-person group preview in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 55% when the game is a win. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with a probability of 8% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 60% when it is a win. For this reason, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed more often at the time of a jackpot than the 6-person group preview in Stage A. As a result, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group preview is executed in Stage A, and the player is People have come to expect that crowd announcements will be carried out.

Note that the reliability of the group notice at stage A and the reliability of the group notice at stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group preview in Stage A and the group preview in Stage B need only be higher in reliability than the SP first half title preview, and the Boingo group preview is higher than the 6-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview. It would be good if the reliability was high.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then executes the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, the firing of the game ball by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and losing symbols etc. are stopped and displayed, and a game stopping state different from the losing symbol is displayed. The display may be controlled so that a display corresponding to the display is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The game is executed by driving the game display unit 26, and the number of pending games is displayed by lighting the game memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing to make settings for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to a predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 or step S56, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects a random number 1 for jackpot determination and a random number 1 for jackpot determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating random number random 2 and random number random 3 and 4 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" At some point, numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating random number random 1 for jackpot determination and random number random 2 for jackpot type determination determines whether or not the fluctuating display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is considered a "jackpot". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step S59, transmission settings for a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 stores the first reservation storage buffer (a storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reservation storage buffer (the storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the second special symbol). It is determined whether there is any pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information (step S1001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes processing to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 20) and a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 21(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 21(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 21(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times), and the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the earlier of the following conditions is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step S1011), the process advances to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any jackpot determination value in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 21(c) are tables used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and stores them in the pending storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 36, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-fluctuation pattern based on random numbers 3 and 4, depending on the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the after fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 26 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the after fluctuation pattern based on the selected after fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 37, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 22. Control is performed to derive and display (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process moves to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the ROМ101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the time between rounds for the normal big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, opening modes for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 3R are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening a normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening a V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in a RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the regular big prize opening in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. . Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step S1313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), and proceeds to step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process moves to step S1315 without performing the process in step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 39, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). A corresponding grand prize opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 40, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process moves to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step S1503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step S1503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning prize counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), a probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process moves to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 82, or controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. One of the controls for closing is performed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 41, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), and a jackpot end time (indication that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, set a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5 (step S1603), update the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), Finish the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a specified command after opening the big winning opening is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V big prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying that the big prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 42, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is present is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step S1711). Then, the process moves to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained.

(Main processing for production control)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. The production control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 43. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 44, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. When receiving a production control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special game is a "lose", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 45, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the production symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols are determined (step S7104), and in step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, a group preview setting process), the process advances to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, symbol fluctuation control is performed according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is used to control the variation display of production symbols, such as production control process timer setting values, production control process timer judgment values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and end codes. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the data, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, Then, control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 46, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing a group preview has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sends a variation pattern command including the after variation patterns of after variation numbers 6 to 8 when a loss occurs, and a variation pattern including after variation patterns of after variation numbers 10 to 12 when a win occurs. Determine whether a command has been received. In addition, the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 8 to 15, and the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 18 to 12. ~26 fluctuation patterns.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not received a variation pattern command that can execute a group preview (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the production control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command that can execute a group notice (Y in step S7061), it converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the previous variation time is 41500 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1246, and the subsequent variation time is 91900 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 3000. For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the previous variation time is 62000 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1861, and the subsequent variation time is 142800 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 4288. .

The performance control CPU 120 executes a group preview lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses the group preview lottery table shown in FIGS. Determine the type of.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the group preview lottery. If the performance control CPU 120 does not win in the group preview lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 wins the group preview lottery (Y in step S7064), it extracts a performance control pattern for executing the group preview according to the stage (step S7065), and ends the process.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the production control is performed so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame of the 1246 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1385th frame among the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of a variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in stage A, production control is performed to execute a group preview from the 1600th frame out of 1861 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 2000th frame out of 4288 frames in the post-variation.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. The group preview execution process is included in the variable display performance process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the performance control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is set, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

If the performance control pattern for executing the group preview has not been set (N in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the performance control pattern for executing a group preview is set (Y in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the frame of the execution timing of the group preview has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

If the execution timing frame of the group preview has not been reached (N in step S7203), the production control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the execution timing frame of the group preview has been reached (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group preview (step S7204). For example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or turn off based on the group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L to Performs control to output sound. After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030 of the special pattern LED board 9020 and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, 10 times in the case of a 10R variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 9030, and the right-hand game display section 9055 continue to perform the right-hand game promoting effect. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-hand hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-hand hitting display section 9030, and the right-hand hitting display section 9055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 9030, and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 9030, and right-handed hitting display section 9055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Design of group preview performance]
Next, the design of the group preview effect at the development stage of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice work process. As shown in FIG. 48, the work processes for group previews are, in the order of work, a summary creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), and an authoring process. (Step S904), sound creation process (Step S905), lottery integration process (Step S906), video integration process (Step S907), sound integration process (Step S908), lamp data The process includes a creation process (step S909) and a lamp assembly process (step S910).

In the outline creation step of step S901, an outline for newly designing a group preview in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created.

In the animation production process of step S902, the animation storyboard used in the group preview is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-board is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. production, and the actual production of animation.

In the main video production process of step S903, video data used in the group preview is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group preview is created in this video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group preview actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created for a long time. As a result, even if the execution time of the group preview becomes longer due to a design change, the video data created in the video production process can be used as is without being changed. In addition, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 1385th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning. In addition, in the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the video so that the group preview is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 2000th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video playback to be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation process of step S905, data for various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group preview are created in accordance with the group preview video.

In the lottery incorporating step of step S906, data regarding various lotteries related to the group preview lottery, such as the group preview lottery, is created. In addition, in the process of incorporating this lottery, the expectation level (reliability) of the group notice etc. is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software to be executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is installed into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software that is executed at the group notice.

In the sound incorporation step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed at the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, data on various lighting conditions such as lighting, blinking, and turning off of lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice is created.

In the lamp installation step of step S910, data such as lighting, blinking, and turning off of various lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation step is used as software for lamp reproduction executed in the pachinko game 1. It is incorporated into the gaming machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery data, video, and sound data related to the group preview performance are created and incorporated as software to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Production of this video)
The main video production process for group previews will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. 49 to 52 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 49, first, in STEP 1, character images to be used in the group preview are prepared. For example, in the group preview, the main character Yumu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to represent Yumu-chan running. Note that such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, a video in which the character steps is created using the four character images g1 to g4 using a video creation tool. For example, when a video creation tool is started, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order from the top, such as layer 1, 2, 3, etc., and the higher the layer is arranged (that is, the lower the number), the closer the image is to the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is supposed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to values desired by the user.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a predetermined layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, and constitute video data A1 to A4. According to the video data A1 to A4, the stepping video has a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of video data A1 to A4 of stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the video of the character stepping will be repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, stepping videos of other characters are created in the same way.

As shown in FIG. 50, in STEP 3, a moving image in which the character advances is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position on both the X-axis and the Y-axis is 0. Therefore, the screen size is -400≦X≦400 and -320≦Y≦320.

By using the settings screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width by which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one cycle of stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and the character images are moved linearly on the X axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500. is set to .

As shown in FIG. 51, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters advance is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), video data in which a character named Jam-chan used in the group preview moves linearly on the X-axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500 is created using the same creation procedure.

As mentioned above, if you create video data for multiple characters that move linearly on the Deploy. Furthermore, by shifting the time axes between characters, it is possible to shift the timing of their appearance. Furthermore, by shifting the Y-axis positions between the characters, it is possible to shift the positions on the Y-axis where the characters appear. Note that the Z-axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the Z axis is the axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen. The performance of the group preview (the Boingo group preview in this embodiment) can be designed so that the characters move between the two sides.

As shown in FIG. 52, in STEP 5, a group preview video is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), a group preview video is completed by placing video data of six types of characters, characters A to F, on the timeline of the layer.

Also, by changing the length of the video data on the timeline, the animation itself can change the speed at which the character moves while maintaining a video in which a pattern of character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three periods. I can do it. For example, like the video data of character C placed on layer 9, the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is video data in which a video pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three periods. , the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed in layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed in layer 9. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 will move on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9, while maintaining the same animation as character C placed on layer 9. .

Note that in the six-person group preview, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52(a) as well, video data of a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same length on the timeline.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of the sand smoke is arranged in layer 1 located on the rearmost side, the moving image of the sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters advance.

In the manner described above, it is possible to create video data of a group preview in which a plurality of characters advance. In addition, in the actual creation of the group preview video data, it is assumed that the game board 2 will cover the edge of a screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 will cover the screen. Group preview video data is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position. Further, in order to be applicable to a screen larger than a predetermined size (eg 19 inches) (eg 20 inches), group preview video data is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the overall picture of the six-person group preview. As shown in FIG. 53, in the six-person group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of six characters, Maid A to Maid F, advancing as a group is displayed. The group preview performance is not limited to six characters, but a plurality of each character appears, so that among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1, the group preview performance has the largest number of characters displayed. Maid A to Maid F are all wearing the same or substantially the same maid outfits, making it difficult to distinguish the types of characters other than recognizing them by their faces. In this embodiment, the designs of the aprons worn by each character are different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the differences at first glance. Note that maid A is Yumu-chan, who is the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, who is the character with the next highest priority after Yumu-chan, who is the protagonist.

In the six-person group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, the face or legs) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, six maid A (Mume-chan) appear, but only five of them have faces visible. That is, among the six maids who appear, one of the maids A's face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid B (Jam-chan) appear, but only four of them have faces visible. That is, among the five maids B who appear, one face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five Maid C's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids C who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Ds appear, of which only three Maid D's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids D who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid E's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids E who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Fs appear, of which only three Maid F's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids F who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, there are two types of characters displayed in a group preview performance: characters whose whole bodies fit within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies (for example, faces) do not fit within the display area of the screen. This includes a character whose other parts of the whole body (for example, parts other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the multiple characters displayed in the group preview are characters with low importance in the content of the pachinko machine 1, such as maids C to F, and maids A (Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan). In the content of pachinko machine 1, maids C to F are more important characters than maids C to F, and maids A and B are more important than maids C to F because their faces do not fit within the display area of the screen. The proportion of parts other than the face that are displayed within the display area of the screen is low. In other words, the six-person group preview is designed so that Maid A and Maid B appear more often while showing their faces than Maid C to F.

(auxiliary display)
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group preview effect. As shown in FIG. 54, in the group preview performance, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the characters are progressing. In this embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as the auxiliary display. By displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, or more effectively, following the advancing character, it is possible to make the player think that the sand smoke is being generated by the progress of the character. This allows you to emphasize the way the character runs through the scene. As shown in FIG. 52(b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is the auxiliary display, is arranged in layer 1 located on the rearmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54, the image of the sand cloud is positioned further back than any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the layer on which Maid E's image is placed is on the front side of the layer on which Maid C's image is placed, so Maid E's image is lower than Maid C's image. is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the auxiliary display image corresponding to Maid E is located on the back side of both Maid E's image and Maid C's image.

In this way, when the display of maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of the maid E is given priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is When the display of Maid C overlaps, the display of Maid C is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to Maid E.

(motion blur processing)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. As shown in FIG. 55, in the group preview presentation, motion blur processing is applied to the advancing characters. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character), and by applying motion blur processing to the display of an advancing character, the afterimage of the character is displayed after the advancing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a lively group preview effect. In addition, when an image resulting from motion blur processing for one character overlaps an image resulting from motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for that character may be applied to avoid obstructing the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspects of outline when characters overlap)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 56, in the group preview presentation, one character may overtake the other characters. At this time, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of another character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), maid B, who is located in front of maid A, is shown passing maid A. In this case, the outline of maid B is larger than that of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid F, overtakes Maid F, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than the outline of Maid F, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that maid B, who is located in front of maid A, overtakes maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is smaller than the outline of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid D, overtakes Maid D, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than that of Maid D, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid D.

In addition, when one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to making the outline of the first character thicker, but also making the size of the first character larger or making the brightness of the first character higher than the brightness of the other character. One character may be displayed more emphatically than the other characters by making the contrast of one character higher or by making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of other characters.

(Display on screen of image display device)
FIG. 57 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during execution of the group preview performance. As shown in FIGS. 54 to 56 described above, since the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is no longer visible. However, as shown in FIG. 57, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 is visible.

Here, in FIG. 57, in the six-person group preview, as shown in (a), while the entirety of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is not yet displayed, a part of the maid A (in this example From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), while the whole of Maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, a part of Maid A is displayed in the first situation. The second maid B (Jam-chan) is displayed more than the situation, and while the entirety of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of her face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will occur. Furthermore, the character displayed first (maid A) and the character displayed second (maid B) have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is viewed while looking into the space between the image display device 5 and the device 5. In other words, FIG. 57 shows a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 17(b), the game board 2 is the image display device Even if the edge of the screen in 5 is covered, in the 6-person group preview, the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is still not shown in its entirety, but a part of the maid A (in this example) From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, but a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 A second situation occurs in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) who was displayed is not displayed yet, but a part of the maid B (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed.

(Overall picture of Bakuchu group preview)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. As shown in FIG. 58, in the Bakuchu group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of characters such as Bakuchu advancing in a group is displayed.

In the Bakuchu group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. Sometimes there are.

In this way, in the Bakuchu group preview, the moving image data of the Bakuchu group preview is created by arranging on the screen an image of an animation in which one type of character moves as if it were moving. Note that the video data for the Bakuchu group preview is also created based on the work steps shown in FIGS. 48 to 52 using the same method as the video data for the 6-person group preview.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group preview performance)
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 59, the group preview effects (6-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo group preview) have a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec). It is divided into

The first display period is a period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends for the first time in the group preview performance. More specifically, the first display period is a period from when any character first appears in the group preview presentation until when any character first disappears. For example, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and the one character continues to advance at the top, the period until the one character disappears becomes the first display period. Alternatively, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and is overtaken by another character, the first display period is the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen. . In this embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, is overtaken by the second character that appears, and then the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the display of a new character continues to start and end. More specifically, during the second display period, after one of the characters first disappears in the group preview performance, new characters continue to appear one after another, and the last character disappears. This is the period until it appears. Note that the second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Furthermore, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is greater than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of a character continues to end without the display of a new character starting. More specifically, the third display period is a period from when the last character appears in the group preview presentation until all the characters disappear. Note that the character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, but may be a character that is removed by the character that appears last. Note that the third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group preview performance, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and change the volume of the performance sound in the first display period. The volume is increased to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, the sound volume corresponding to the group preview performance is at the minimum volume (for example, muted or lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases in volume. Once the specified value is reached, the specified value (for example, the set volume or maximum volume) is maintained thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. Thereafter, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at the specified value, and then gradually decreases step by step until it reaches the minimum.

Note that the gradual increase in the volume in stages from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the gradual decrease in the volume from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as a volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound increases from the minimum to the specified value is such that the volume of the production sound decreases during the third display period. This is shorter than the fade-out time from the start until the volume of the performance sound reaches its minimum.

The brightness data table includes a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means include the frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, and electric lamp. Includes game effect lamps such as a chew lamp 9H, a stick controller lamp 9J, and a trigger button lamp 9K. The brightness data table includes a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period, a second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third brightness data table corresponding to the third display period. . That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and in the second display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the In the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of occurrence of 6-person group notice in Stage A)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the six-person group preview is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in Figure 60, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the six-person group preview starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 in which SP reach is lost in the first half, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the second half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the second half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed is the timing (2331st frame) close to half of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that will win at the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the 6-person group notice is It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display suggests that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the six-person group preview is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. . However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In the predetermined period, the first display period of the six-person group preview may be configured to start in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Bakuchu group preview is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-fluctuation.

For example, as shown in Figure 61, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the Bakuchu group preview starts from the 66,600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 that results in a loss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the second half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group preview is executed (2000th frame) is a timing close to half (2331st frame) of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that hits in the second half of the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display indicates that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice is not configured to start in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. do not have. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview of the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 62 to 86, the brightness data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling various lighting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light emission) location of the game effect lamp in accordance with the display in the group preview based on the brightness data stored in the brightness data table. In this embodiment, a lighting location literally refers to a lighting location. For example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a lighting location is a location where a lighting lamp is located, and other lighting locations are defined as lighting locations. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is off) is located is not called a lit location. In other examples, a lit location refers to a location that is lit with high brightness, for example, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp is lit. A location where a lamp is lit at a lower brightness than the luminance of a lamp located at the lighting location may not be called a lighting location.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as elements) for turning on or off a lamp is defined by a brightness data table, and in such a brightness data table, the data storage area referenced by a particular lamp is If data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored, the particular lamp is turned off. Further, if there is no storage area for data referenced by a specific lamp in the brightness data table, or if the brightness data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a brightness data table that a specific lamp refers to, and the data storage area that the specific lamp refers to contains one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB). is stored, the specific lamp lights up.For example, when a specific performance such as a jackpot preview performance is executed during a performance corresponding to a normal background, the lamp that is referenced in the specific performance is Even if data for a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if data for a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table that is referenced in the production corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp will be lit. I will do it.

(Parent table in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 62, the parent table in the group preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each group preview performance is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled for 3140 msec to match the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 63, in the child table of the group preview brightness data table, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 96 and FIGS. 151 to 153, which will be described later), of the period in which the group preview effect is executed, the frame lamp is W1, and the accessory lamp 9A is Grandchild tables Y1, L1 for the board left lamp 9B, U1 for the top lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided, respectively. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 59.

In the second display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later), during the period in which the group preview effect is executed, W2 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y2 is displayed for the accessory lamp 9A, A grandchild table of L2 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U2 is provided for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 59.

During the period in which the group preview effect is executed, in the third display period (the effect period shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W3, the accessory lamp 9A is Y3, A grandchild table of L3 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U3 is provided for the on board lamp 9C, and A3 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG. 59.

As shown in FIG. 63, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group preview effect, the frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R, Six types of brightness data tables are provided: object lamp 9A, panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

Note that the V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, near where the characters appear in the group preview performance), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table Also not available. The V lamp 9G is a lamp that informs that the round is in a jackpot game state where a V winning can occur, that a V winning has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, so it is used in the group preview performance. This is because if the lights turn on, players will think that they have won a V prize or hit the jackpot.To avoid this kind of inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group preview presentation. Not yet. Note that the V lamp 9G may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance. It is sufficient that it is not used in .

In addition, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are positioned at positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, in the group preview performance, the characters advance). (nearly directly below the scene), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table is not prepared either. The stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt a pull operation on the stick controller 31A during an operation performance (the performance shown in FIG. 132 (c91) described later), etc., and the trigger button lamp 9K lights up to prompt a pull operation of the stick controller 31A during a PUSH performance (the performance shown in FIG. 93 (described later)). This lamp is lit to prompt the user to press the push button 31B in the performance shown in a19), so if it is lit during the group preview performance, the player cannot operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group preview presentation. Note that the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance; However, it is sufficient that it is not used in the group preview performance.

The characteristics of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used as grandchild tables in the group preview presentation are summarized as follows. Specifically, the number of high-intensity lighting locations is greater in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 performs lighting control at equal intervals of 100 msec, whereas W2 performs lighting control at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 performs lighting control at irregular intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L. While the lighting control is performed at short intervals of 80 msec, the lighting control of the frame right lamp 9R is performed at long intervals of 80 msec.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the brightness data for W1 is stipulated so that the lights are lit at high brightness while moving the lighting locations according to the direction of advance of the group notice, whereas for W2, the lights are lit at high brightness across multiple locations. For W3, the brightness data is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice. There is. Regarding the initial brightness data, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that all the lamps are turned off or lit at low brightness, whereas for W2 and W3, the brightness data is specified so that predetermined lighting locations are made to emit light at high brightness. Brightness data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the last luminance data, W3 is defined such that all the lamps, both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, are turned off or turned on at low brightness.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 are not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used, whereas W2's luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used. Regarding brightness data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting purposes, W1 and W3 are defined, whereas W2 is not defined.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the group preview luminance data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, Furthermore, at the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting. In addition, in W1, first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp at low luminance and data for lighting each lamp at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data is also defined for other times.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "R" for all lamps included in the frame lamp, "G" and " “B” is defined as “0” indicating that the light is off. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness. It becomes like this. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R", and "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "G" and "B". For example, when each lamp lights up mainly in green, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "G", and "R" and "B" are defined as "0" indicating off. It is sufficient if “0” indicating off is specified for “B”, and “1” indicating low brightness is specified for “B” when each lamp lights up mainly in blue, and “OFF” is specified for “R” and “G”. ``0'' indicating ``0'' may be specified.

In addition, in W1, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the lamps are lit at high brightness from near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp at equal intervals of 100 msec. The brightness data is specified so that it moves by . Here, the areas around the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8 correspond to the locations where the characters appear in the group preview, and the brightness data is set so that the locations of the lamps lit at high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. stipulated. The lamp on the left side of the frame is initially off or lit at low brightness, and gradually increases in intensity as the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Brightness data is specified so that the light is turned on according to the brightness. On the other hand, the lamps 9R5 to 9R8 on the right side of the frame, which were initially lit at high brightness, will turn off or turn off at low brightness as the lamps that are lit at high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Brightness data is specified in . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 96 and FIGS. 151 to 153, which will be described later, the frame lamp also moves from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the characters appearing from the right end of the screen in the group preview. The position of the high-intensity light will change towards the left side.

In addition, W1 includes data for lighting one frame lamp at high brightness and extinguishing other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp, and the brightness is set so that the parts of the lamps that are lit in stages move. Data is specified. Thereby, in W1, the location of the lamp that is lit at high brightness can be moved in accordance with the direction in which the character is moving.

Further, in W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely set to high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

Here, if data for these 10 minutes were not provided, if W1 was used to control the lamp lighting and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the lamp lighting control would be performed again from T1-1. Even though the characters in the group preview have already appeared and the progress is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the high rise again starts from near the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8. The part of the lamp that lights up depending on the brightness moves, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in this embodiment, data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, so even if lighting control is performed using W1 and the transition to W2 is not made due to some abnormality, the data for 10 minutes is Since the frame lamp can be turned on in a light emission mode that matches the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable. If the abnormality is resolved within these 10 minutes, the player can continue playing the game without feeling any discomfort.

In W1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

In addition, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes stipulated in W1 is brightness data in which adjacent frame lamps are turned on regularly in order so that the lighting points are shifted from the previous state of T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is displayed for each lamp at irregular intervals from T2-1 to T2-10 every 50 to 80 msec. stipulated. In addition, in W2, first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp at low luminance and data for lighting each lamp at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning off each lamp or lighting at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also defined for other times.

W2 includes brightness data that causes one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness, and lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit at high brightness. The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W2, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that the light is lit at high brightness in multiple locations. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98 and FIGS. 154 and 155, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group preview performance, the frame lamp is displayed in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. will start to light up sparsely and at high brightness. Further, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps at higher brightness than W1.

Note that in W2, unlike W1, luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the lighting control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality and the lamp lighting control is performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps will become sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is simply repeated, the player does not feel particularly uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data that is referenced every time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but the time required to create each data Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which makes it extremely inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of this embodiment, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10, so that only one set of data that is repeatedly referenced can be created. This can improve time efficiency. The reason why lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data during the second display period in the group preview performance is that the second display period in the group preview performance is longer than the first display period or the third display period. In addition, the second display period in the group preview performance is a time period in which the screen is filled with multiple characters and the multiple characters advance as a group, so the lighting corresponding to such a performance is This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same lighting mode.

As shown in FIG. 64(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is displayed for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 10 msec from T3-7 to T3-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued from T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec. RGB data is specified.

In addition, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T3-2 to T3-30, the lamps that were lit at high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or become dim. Increase the number of lamps that turn off or turn on at low brightness so that they turn on at high brightness. Regarding T3-7 to T3-38, brightness data is specified at 80 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later, the frame lamp changes from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 to the left side in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview. The position where the light turns off or lights up at low brightness changes over time.

Furthermore, in W3, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition from T3 to 30. Furthermore, in W3, similarly to W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

In W3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for accessory lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. RRRR”. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Note that monochromatic LEDs have fewer light-blocking filters than full-color LEDs, so the light is emitted more intensely. For this reason, monochrome LEDs have smaller brightness data corresponding to high brightness than full-color LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In Y1, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is turned on in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 65(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A is The brightness data is specified.

Y2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the characters are The lamp 9A starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in Y2, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided as in Y1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, similarly to Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the accessory lamp 9A is lit at low brightness so that the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not feel strange when moving to the next performance.

In Y3, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grandchild table for panel left lamp in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. As mentioned above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. "WWWWW" is displayed. It should be noted that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the left lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B are turned off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Furthermore, in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the board left lamp 9B is set to match the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the board left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In L1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 66(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, each lamp on the left lamp 9B is The brightness data is specified.

L2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the left side of the board is The lamp 9B starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in L2, unlike in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, similarly to L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the board left lamp 9B is lit at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the board left lamp 9B when moving to the next performance.

In L3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for on-board lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (red)). The LED has three colors: R), green (G), and blue (B), and the brightness is expressed as hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are larger than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the on-board lamp 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is set in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next second display period. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In U1, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 67(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, each lamp on the board lamp 9C is The brightness data is specified.

U2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the board is displayed in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. The lamp 9C starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in U2, unlike U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similarly to U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next performance.

In U3, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

Note that in all of U1, U2, and U3, only data "0" is defined for the monochromatic on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. That is, the lamps 9C6 to 9C8 on the board are not used in the group preview presentation.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to The brightness is expressed as a hexadecimal number "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and its brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are larger than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the V attacker lamp 9F, the value representing high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are turned off. Or it will turn on at low brightness. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Furthermore, in A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, each lamp is set to a high brightness sparsely in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of each lamp when moving to the next second display period. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

In A1, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. has been done.

A2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group preview performance, the attacker lamp is displayed in accordance with the appearance of the characters advancing in a group in the group preview performance. 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F begin to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in A2, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided as in A1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, similarly to A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9H will be turned on so that there will be no discomfort in the lighting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F when moving to the next production. The brightness data is defined so that the lamp 9F is turned off or turned on at low brightness.

In A3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Parent table in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 69, the parent table in the reach line brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each performance time of the reach line performance is defined.

The reach line performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. It is a performance that suggests (or informs) people. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92 and FIGS. 139 to 142, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5 with a flash of light. , the reach line expands inwardly and outwardly (in the left-right direction) to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, shrinks and expands, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec to match the reach line performance.

(child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 70, in the child table of the reach line brightness data table, the time of the reach line effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which flash occurs (the effect period shown in FIGS. 89(a8), (a9) and FIGS. 139(a8), (a9), which will be described later), the frame Grandchild tables W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the board left lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided.

During the period in which the reach line effect is executed, in the period in which the reach line occurs (the effect period shown in FIGS. 90 and 140 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the board left lamp. L12 grandchild tables are provided for each node 9B. Note that during the period in which the reach line occurs, the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used, so no grandchild table is prepared.

During the period during which the reach line effect is executed, the reach line extends inward and outward and expands while contracting (as shown in FIGS. 91 (a13) to 92 (b17) and FIGS. 141 (a13) to 142 (b17), which will be described later). During the production period), the following grandchild tables are provided: W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the board left lamp 9B, U13 for the top board lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E.

During the period when the reach line performance is executed, during the period when the reach line disappears (the period of the performance shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the board left lamp 9B, U14 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 70, regarding the brightness data table referenced in the reach line effect, the left side of the frame is Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a top board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the brightness data table referred to during the period in which the reach line occurs, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of brightness data tables are provided.

In this way, in the reach line performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as the group preview performance or fewer lamps than the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the game is now reachable, and is not a performance that arouses the player's expectations by suggesting a jackpot like the group preview performance. For this reason, the reach line performance does not perform elaborate lighting control such as providing different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually, as in the group preview performance. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, so that each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the execution time of the reach line effect is shorter than that of the group preview effect, it is difficult to set up different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually, as in the group preview effect. Rather than performing lighting control based on the lighting control, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. .

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 140, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

As shown in FIG. 71(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

As shown in FIG. 71(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the frame lamp also goes out as the reach line goes out.

(Grand table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of an accessory lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to lighting, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), in the grandchild table Y11, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), in the grandchild table Y12, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 140, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while a reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the grandchild table Y13, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 72(d), in the grandchild table Y14, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". Thereby, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the accessory lamp 9A also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the reach line brightness data table. It should be noted that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 140, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), in the grandchild table L13, luminance data is defined for the left lamp 9B at intervals of 60 msec from T13-1 to T13-4. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 73(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the board left lamp 9B also goes out at the same time as the reach line goes out.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Furthermore, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the grandchild table U11, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are Brightness data is specified so that the light is lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the grandchild table U13, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, while the reach line is occurring, lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are lit with high brightness. The brightness data is defined as follows.

As shown in FIG. 74(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the on-board lamp 9C also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when a flash occurs, the brightness is set so that the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are lit at high brightness. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), in the grandchild table A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp at intervals of 60 msec from T13-1 to T13-4. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are lit at high brightness while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), in the grandchild table A14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off in conjunction with the disappearance of the reach line.

(Parent table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 76, the parent table in the background preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each background preview performance is defined.

The background preview performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background).

In the parent table of the background preview brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec to match the background preview effect.

(Child table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 77, in the child table of the background preview brightness data table, the time of the background preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, during the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W21 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y21 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L21 is used for the left lamp 9B, U21 is used for the top lamp 9C, and U21 is used for the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background preview effect is executed, W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the accessory lamp 9A, L22 for the board left lamp 9B, U22 for the top lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

During the last 600,000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the accessory lamp 9A, L23 for the board left lamp 9B, U23 for the top lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

As shown in FIG. 77, regarding the luminance data table referred to in the background preview effect, in the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600000 msec, the left frame lamp 9L, the right frame lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A Six types of brightness data tables are provided: , panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

In this way, in the background preview performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 78(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), in the grandchild table Y21, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in the grandchild table Y22, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 20 msec from T22-1 to T22-2.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), in the grandchild table Y23, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Furthermore, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), in the grandchild table U22, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the grandchild table U23, luminance data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T21-1 to T21-2 at 50 msec intervals. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 82(c), in the grandstand table A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F is activated from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec. Luminance data is defined for .

(Brightness data table when all lights on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full lighting. As shown in FIGS. 83(a) to (h), in the brightness data table when all lights are on, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, High brightness brightness data (in this example, "F" which is the maximum value) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH performance)
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during PUSH performance. The PUSH performance is a performance that prompts the user to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 93 (a19), which will be described later.

FIG. 84(a) shows a brightness data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, brightness data is defined for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during the PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp etc. during the group preview performance.

FIG. 84(b) shows a brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. At T41, brightness data is defined for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp etc. during the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group preview luminance data table according to the modification. As shown in FIG. 85, in the child table in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table that is referred to in each time period. (also referred to as a brightness data table) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the group preview effect is executed, during the period (2000 msec) up to the middle of the first display period, W101 is for the frame lamp, Y101 is for the accessory lamp 9A, L101 is for the left lamp 9B, L101 is the top lamp. Grandchild tables U101 and A101 are provided for the attacker lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period in which the group preview effect is executed, for the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec), the frame lamp is W102, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y102. , L102 for the board left lamp 9B, U102 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modification.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period during which the group preview effect is executed, W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 for the board left lamp 9B, and U103 for the top lamp 9C. , and the grandchild table of A103 are provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modification.

In this way, in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, in the first brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and during the first display period, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts. The control of the game effect lamp 9 is completed in the second brightness data table, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is continued during the second display period. However, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and in the third brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group preview brightness data table according to the modification. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is defined for each lamp at equal intervals of 20 msec from T101-1 to T101-10, and furthermore, at the last time T101-11. 10 minutes (600,000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

As shown in FIG. 86(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T102-1 to T102-10 at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec. W102 includes brightness data that causes one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness, and lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit at high brightness. The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W102, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that the light is lit at high brightness across multiple locations. As a result, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in a group in the group preview performance. Further, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps at higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 86(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp from T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 2 msec from T103-7 to T103-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued at long intervals of 14 msec from T103-7 to T103-38. RGB data is defined.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were lit at high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are turned off gradually or turned off at low brightness in stages. Or increase the number of lamps that turn on at low brightness. Regarding T103-7 to T103-38, brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. Thereby, in accordance with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left end of the screen in the group notice, the position where the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko game machine 1.

Further, in W103, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition from T103-30. Furthermore, in W103, similarly to W101, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 172, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. In this embodiment, a performance mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which pseudo variation is performed twice is selected. Further, in the figure, hatching indicates how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks.

(Production mode at stage A)
With reference to FIGS. 87 to 109, the production mode in stage A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 87(a1), when variable display starts based on one pending memory, decorative symbols are variably displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) flying as a character appearing in Stage A is displayed. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 87(a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 87(a3), , the second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" are displayed indicating that the third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 88 (a5). Then, the third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 89 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 69 to 75. In the state shown in FIG. 89(a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 89(a9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 90 (a12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 90, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 92 (a18), if a six-person group preview is executed, the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 93 (a19), and if a background preview is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 102 The process moves to the effect shown in (a101), and if the lamp notice is to be executed, the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 103 (a111).

As mentioned above, the six-person group preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and six characters dressed as maids appear in a group. The performance progresses as follows. A background preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of a variable display of a special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) This is an effect that is displayed together with a background (for example, a starry sky background). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a performance that indicates that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A, etc.). It is a performance that lights up or flashes. In the lamp notice, any one lamp or plural lamps among the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinking, or lamps provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked. You may blink.

In stage A, a group preview (for example, a six-person group preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed after the reach line performance of the previous change. For example, when the six-person group preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 93 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by using a sound.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! An effect occurs where the text image of “!” disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH performance. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, a six-person group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a22), the six-person group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a23), in the first display period, the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), appears as the first (first) character. Note that the state shown in FIG. 94 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. This shows a first situation in which a part (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During execution of the six-person group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the parts where the characters appear in the group preview begin to light up with high brightness, and then At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up at high brightness will move. In addition, the scene where the group preview performance (six-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo preview described below) was performed, images other than those related to the group preview performance (for example, background images, images related to the first half of SP Reach preview, etc.) ), the brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images, which has decreased during the group preview presentation, gradually returns to the original brightness in stages during the third display period. On the other hand, the fourth symbol 5J and small symbol 5M indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number, the first pending memory display area 5D, the second pending memory display area 5U, the active display area 5A, etc. The display of information related to games with high importance in terms of wins and losses and advantages of games is given a high priority so that the brightness will not be lowered even if a group preview effect is executed.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 59, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 94 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. Although the whole of Maid B (Jam-chan), who was displayed more than in the first situation and was displayed second, was not displayed yet, a part of Maid B (part of her face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 95 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear. As shown in FIG. 95 (a27), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a28), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the second character that appears running at the top (first) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 96 (a29), the second character running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 96 (a30), the character running at the top and appearing second is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a31), in the second display period, an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in groups in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 97(a32) to 98(a36), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation is displayed in which the last character appears and runs along with other characters from the left side of the screen to the right side. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. In addition, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37), when entering the third display period, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a38), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 99 (a38), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 99 (a39), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIGS. 100 (a40) and (a41), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 100 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group preview effect ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, a comparative example of a six-person group preview will be compared with a six-person group preview according to the present embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a201), similarly to the present embodiment shown in FIG. This is the first situation in which a part of the face (in this example, part of the face) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 94 (a24), while the whole of the maid A that was initially displayed is not displayed yet, a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and In contrast to the second situation in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) displayed is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, the maid A continues to run, and the entire maid A is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a203), the second maid B appears only after the first maid A has run to the left of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not appear to be a group preview presentation.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 100, an animation in which multiple characters appear and run one after another without any gaps is displayed, so multiple characters advance as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful performance. Further, since the number of characters that overtake other characters is smaller than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group preview performance from becoming too complicated. Note that the number of characters that overtake other characters may be greater than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, a lively group preview performance can be shown to the player.

When the background preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 102 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (a103), as a background preview, a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed on an image display device with a specific background (in this example, a starry sky background). 5 is displayed on the screen. Furthermore, during the performance of the background preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance of the background preview based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background preview.

When the lamp preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 103 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH performance, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (a113), a lamp preview is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, accessory lamp 9A, etc.) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks. Incidentally, effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp preview.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 100 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 102 (a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. 103 (a113) ends, As shown in FIG. 108, a symbol feeding effect is executed. The symbol feeding effect determines whether or not the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed (in this embodiment, the ornamental symbol in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C) stops in the ornamental symbol that is in the reach mode, and the ornament that stops. This is a performance that prompts the player to decide whether or not the symbol is a decorative symbol constituting a jackpot symbol. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a43), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104 (a44) to 105 (a48), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 106(a49) to 107(a54), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIGS. 108(a55) to 107(a57), As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 108 (a57), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect has been completed, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a58) and (a59), an effect called whiteout is applied to the image including the character image and the "3" decorative pattern in reach mode. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Figure 109 (a59), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

(Production mode in the first half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 110 to 118, the presentation mode in the first half of SP reach will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 110 (a61) and (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 110 (a63), the title of SP Reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as an SP reach performance, a maid character such as Yumu-chan catches Bakushu, so the title "Catch Bakushu!" is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 111 (c1), when the first half of the SP reach is performed, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) standing in a dignified position is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(c2), an image in which Bakuchu, the opponent's character (enemy character), is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 111(c3) to 112(c5), an animation is displayed in which Maid A chases the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 112 (c6), after an animation in which Maid A pounces on Bakuchu is displayed, if there is a loss (in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 9), the effect shifts to the effect shown in Figure 113 (c11). However, when there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20), it shifts to the production shown in Figure 115 (c21), and when it moves to the second half of SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23), or When moving to the final reach (in the case of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 15 and 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c31).

If the loss is confirmed in the first half of SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 112 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 113 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 113 (c11), an image of Maid A depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (c12), due to a production effect called blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that were in a losing state is changed. It gradually becomes black, and as shown in Figure 113 (c13), eventually the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, become completely invisible. .

After that, as shown in Figures 114 (c14) and (c15), when the transparency of the entire front screen that has become black due to blackout is gradually increased, the normal background that was switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When a jackpot is confirmed in the first half of SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 112 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 115 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 115 (c21), an image of Maid A catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. 3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 115 (c22), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 115 (c23). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 116(c24) and (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 117 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

When moving to the second half of SP reach or the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 112 (c6), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 118 (c31), an image of Maid A depressed because she could not catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (c32), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that are lost is gradually blackened. Up to this point, the effect is the same as when the player loses in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 113 (c11) and (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 118 (c33), when moving to the second half of SP reach or the final reach, an effect is performed in which the movable body 32 falls, which did not occur when the player lost in the first half of SP reach.

Then, after the effect of the movable body 32 falling is executed, when moving to the latter half of SP reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c41), and the final When shifting to reach (in the case of variation patterns with main variation numbers 15 and 26), the production shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71). In this way, among the fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot, there are fluctuation patterns that pretend that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, and then shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach. As a result, from the player's perspective, once he thinks that he will lose in the first half of the SP reach, he will be able to shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Production mode in the second half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 119 to 125, the production mode in the second half of SP reach will be explained.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c33), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c41), character images, background images, etc. become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Figure 119 (c42), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image of the second half of SP Reach, which had been switched on the back side, appears. It becomes visible. During the performance of the second half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach.

As shown in Figure 119 (c42), when the second half of SP Reach is performed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war against Bakuchu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c43) to 120 (c45), an animation is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B chase Bakuchu as he runs away.

As shown in Figure 119 (c46), after an animation in which Maid A and Maid B jump at Bakuchu is displayed, the case of losing (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 12) is shown in Figure 121 (c51). When the game moves to the production, and when there is a jackpot (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 23), it shifts to the production shown in Figure 123 (c61), and when it moves to the final reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 15 and 26) The process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71).

If the loss is confirmed in the latter half of SP reach, after the performance shown in Fig. 120 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Fig. 123 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 123 (c51), an image of Maid A and Maid B depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c52), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 121 (c53), eventually the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which are in the losing mode, become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Figures 122 (c54) and (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that had been switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

If the jackpot is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 120 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 123 (c61). In the performance shown in FIG. 123 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 123 (c62), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, as shown in Figure 123 (c63). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 124 (c64) and (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 125 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production mode at final reach)
With reference to FIGS. 126 to 136, the performance mode in the final reach will be described.

When moving to the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c46), the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71). When moving to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black, as shown in Figure 126 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect appears in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 126 (c72). be done. After that, as shown in Figure 126 (c73), a production is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, along with the message "Let's go!" ” is displayed. Note that the light effect display as shown in FIG. 126 (c72) is a combination of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71) and the effect in which the main character's face image is displayed as shown in FIG. 126 (c73). It is deliberately inserted in between. Thereby, by the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c72), it is possible to more easily convey to the player that the final reach will be reached.

After that, the performance during the final reach will be executed. During the second half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 127 (c74), an image of maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 127 (c75) to 127 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at multiple timings, and as shown in Figure 127 (c79), an image of the entire sentence is displayed. This indicates the theme of the performance that will be executed at the final reach. In this example, "all members gather" is indicated.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 129 (c80) to 130 (c85), animations introducing characters appearing in the final reach performance are displayed at multiple timings. For example, in this example, supporting characters appear in order, such as Maid F, Maid E, Maid D, Maid C, Maid B, Maid A, etc., and near the end (or in the second half), characters with higher priority such as the main character appear. A character appears. Note that characters with a high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable for characters with high priority, such as the main character, to appear at the beginning (or in the first half) or near the end (or in the second half) so that they stand out more than characters with low priority, such as supporting characters.

After that, as shown in Figure 131 (c86), when the final reach effect is executed, an image of the six characters that appeared in the six-person group preview standing up and declaring war against Bakuchu is displayed. be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 131 (c87) to 132 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 132 (c90), after an animation in which six characters chase a blowjob is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 132 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit in which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the words "Close!!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 132 (c91), in the event of a loss (in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 133 (c101), and in the event of a jackpot (In the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 134 (c111).

If a loss is confirmed in the final reach, after the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in FIG. 132 (c91), the performance shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 133 (c101). In the production shown in FIG. 133 (c101), an image of six characters depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (c102), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 133 (c103), eventually the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that have become lose modes become completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if you gradually increase the transparency of the entire front screen that has become black due to blackout, the normal background effect image that was switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When a jackpot is confirmed in the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 132 (c91), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 134 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 134 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. Stop.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 134 (c112), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 134 (c113). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 135 (c114) and (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 136 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production style at stage B)
With reference to FIGS. 137 to 157, the performance mode in stage B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 137(b1), when the variable display starts based on one pending memory, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b2), when the pseudo continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 137 (b3), , a second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" are displayed indicating that the third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 138 (b5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 139 (b7), a decorative pattern for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 139 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 69 to 75. Note that the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 69 to 75 are the same as the brightness data tables used in the stage A reach line performance. In the state shown in FIG. 139(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 139(b9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode. Note that the reach line that appears in stage B may be the same as the reach line that appears in stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, etc., for example.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 140 (b12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 140, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141 (b14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141 (b15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually shrinks step by step, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (b18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 142 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 143 to 147. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b19), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 143 (b20) to 144 (b24), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (b25) to FIG. 146 (b30), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIG. 147 (b31) to (b33). As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 147 (b33), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 148 (b34) and (b35), due to whiteout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol "3" in the ready-to-reach mode is gradually whitened. Eventually, the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode disappears completely. After that, as shown in Figure 148 (b36), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

As shown in FIGS. 149 (b37) and (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 149 (b39), the title of SP Reach ("Catch the Bakuchu!") is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

In stage B, a group preview (for example, a Bakuchu preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed during a period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-change is being displayed. For example, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed during the period when the title of the first half of SP reach is being displayed, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 150 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by using a sound.

As shown in FIG. 150 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH performance, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH performance. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, the Bakuchu group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 150 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b43), the Bakuchu group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 151 (b44), while the entirety of the first (first) character is not yet displayed, a part of the first character (in this example, part of the face) is not displayed. ) is displayed, representing the first situation.

During execution of the Bakuchu group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the parts where the characters appear in the group preview begin to light with high brightness, and then At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up at high brightness will move.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 59, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b45), the second character appears soon after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 151 (b45) is such that while the entire first character is not yet displayed, a part of the first character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the second This represents a second situation in which a part of the second character (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed while the entire character displayed in the second position is not yet displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (b46) to (b48), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b49), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the first character displayed running at the top reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 153 (b50), the first character displayed running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 153 (b51), the first character displayed running at the top disappears from the left end of the screen first. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b52), in the second display period, an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in a group in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b52) to FIG. 155 (b57), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

When the characters run in a group from the left side of the screen to the right side, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' .

As shown in FIG. 156 (b58), in the third display period, an animation in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 156 (b58), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 156 (b59), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 156 (b59), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the right frame lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 156 (b60), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIG. 156, as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the title display of ``Catch Bakuchu!'' gradually reappears in stages. At this time, if you have won the SP first half title preview lottery, the SP first half title preview will be performed by changing the display format (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch the Bakuchu!" . For example, as shown in Figure 149 (b39), before the Bakuchu group preview is executed, the text "Catch the Bakchu!" in the title display in the first half of SP reach is white, but as shown in Figure 155 (b56) As shown in , when the character image in the group preview is subsequently displayed on the layer in front of the layer where the title is displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview, the text "Catch Bakuchu!" in the title display switches to red, and as shown in Figures 156 (b59) and (b60), the characters in the group preview disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 157 (b61) and (b62), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 157 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group preview effect ends. Thereafter, the process shifts to the first half of SP reach shown in FIG. 111(c1).

(Boingo group preview)
With reference to FIGS. 158 to 167, the presentation mode of the Boingo group preview will be described.

In the six-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview described above, a plurality of characters advance as a group from the right edge of the screen toward the left edge. In this way, the six-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview were effects in which the characters progressed in the X-axis direction on the XY plane shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the Boingo group preview, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group preview is a 3D performance in which characters advance in a three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 158 to 163 are diagrams for explaining the production mode when the Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. Note that even when the Boingo group is executed in stage B, the performance mode is the same as that shown in FIGS. 158 to 163. Although not shown, the Boingo group preview performance also includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, similar to the six-person group preview performance and the Bakuchu group preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 158 (d1), the Boingo group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

During execution of the Boingo group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance, based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, for example. For example, in the group preview, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the locations where the characters appear begin to light up with high brightness, and then the locations of the lamps that light up with high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. In addition, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running.

As shown in FIG. 158(d2), a preceding image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point where the character group appears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(d3), the first character appears from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in Figures 159 (d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually moves towards the screen. be done. As shown in FIG. 159 (d6), as the initially displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 160 (d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and advance from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, so that the characters cover the entire screen. As shown in FIGS. 161 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and advances from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 162 (d13) and (d14), as the last character progresses from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, it comes to cover most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end of the screen to the other end, and the last character covers the entire screen.

After that, as shown in Figures 163 (d16) and (d17), as the last character disappears from the screen, the original background image is displayed, and as shown in Figure 153 (d18), when the last character disappears, the original background image is displayed. The group preview performance ends.

FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining details of the Boingo group notice. 164(A) to (F) correspond to FIGS. 158(d3) to 159(d6), and FIGS. 160(d8) and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 164(A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 164(B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the initially displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 164(E) and (F), even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so the subsequent character image must not be placed. Good too.

Here, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice and the Boingo group notice according to this embodiment will be compared with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 165, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the preceding image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 158 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the strange feeling of a character suddenly appearing large, it is necessary to create an animation in which the character is displayed small and then gradually enlarged, as shown in Figures 165 and 166. .

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIG. 165 (d101) to FIG. 166 (d105) is performed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 158 (d3) as shown in FIG. 166 (d106). This requires additional production time, and images for animation must also be created. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158(d2) and (d3), a preliminary image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character appears, so this light By displaying the first character from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image due to the effect, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in Figure 158 (d3) and Figure 166 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Variation example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a boingo group notice according to a modification is executed. The example shown in FIG. 167 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 163. For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (d101) to (d103), as the last displayed character disappears, the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 158 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview on the layer in front of the layer in which the normal background image is displayed, the image shown in FIG. 167 (d103) , the normal background image may be switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. In this way, the group preview performance may be executed while the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed.

Further, the title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 157 to foretell a jackpot. Furthermore, instead of enlarging the last character to cover the entire screen, the next effect may be switched to using an animation in which the background image used for the group preview effect is rolled up like a scroll.

(dog group notice)
With reference to FIGS. 168 to 170, the presentation mode of the dog group notice will be explained.

In this embodiment, a six-person group preview, a Bakuchu preview, and a Boingo group preview are illustrated as group preview performances, but the pachinko game machine 1 is also known as a dog group preview as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170. It may also be possible to execute a group preview effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168(e1), the first character is displayed, then multiple dog characters appear one after another as shown in FIG. 168(e2), and then as shown in FIG. 168(e3). The screen area may be covered by a group of characters as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 169 (e4) to (e6), as the last displayed character disappears, the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character images in the group preview performance on the layer in front of the layer in which the normal background image is displayed, the screen shown in FIG. 169 (e6) , the normal background image is switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the performance of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image in the first half of the SP in the dog group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 157 to foretell a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 170, when comparing the six-person group notice and the dog group notice, the distance between the first character displayed in the dog group notice and the last character displayed (the length between them on the (b) X2 is shorter than the distance (the length between them on the X axis) X1 between the first character displayed and the last character displayed in the six-person group preview. Further, since the execution times are the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group preview is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six person group preview. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group preview is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six person group preview. In addition, the dog group preview performance has a higher expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot than the six-person group preview performance, and the dog group preview performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group preview performance.

(Execution of group preview performance during reach line performance)
With reference to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, an explanation will be given of an effect mode when a group preview effect is executed during the reach line.

As shown in FIG. 171 (f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group preview effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 171 (f2) to (f4), and then, in the state shown in FIGS. ), a symbol feeding effect may be executed.

[Main composition and effects]
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Blessing effect execution means for executing a congratulatory effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that displays an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result (for example, a process for executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) ) and,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance (for example, the fanfare performance shown in FIGS. 115 to 117 is performed after the six-person group preview performance shown in FIGS. 94 to 100 is performed),
If it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result that is different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern of variation number 9), and the variable display is In the first predetermined period (for example, the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. 60) until the display suggests that the display is a losing display result, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61),
In cases where it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the variable display has not changed since the start of the variable display. In the second predetermined period (for example, T3+T4 period, T5+T6 period, T7+T8 period) until the specific display result is suggested, the first display period is the first half of the second predetermined period. starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, the feeling of elation may fade over time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but if the result of the variable display is a fluctuating pattern that results in a losing display, in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group preview performance, the feeling of elation can be sustained or revived. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, a fanfare performance that is a blessing performance is performed, so the group preview performance is performed in the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation. , Even if the feeling of elation fades over time, it can be sustained or rekindled through a blessing performance.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. That is, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the gaming state to be advantageous. In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the lighting corresponding to the jackpot occurs. A combination of aspects results in a specific display result. In addition, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot is specified. The result will be displayed. Furthermore, the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 may be a specific special pattern (for example, a jackpot such as "3, 3, 3" or "7, 7, 7"). A jackpot occurs when the machine stops with a symbol combination), and the display of the specific special symbol becomes the specific display result.

The "losing display result" is a display result that is different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the losing display result. That is, the losing display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous even if it is derived. In this embodiment, when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss; A combination of corresponding lighting modes becomes a losing display result. In addition, when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will result in a loss display. Furthermore, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 become a specific predetermined pattern (for example, a losing pattern combination such as "3, 2, 3") and stop. Sometimes, the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the gaming value imparting rate (for example, the payout rate of game balls) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In this embodiment, a jackpot game state that is controlled when each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 9 occur is exemplified as an advantageous state. The advantageous state may be a small winning game state that is controlled when a small winning occurs, or may be a variable probability state or a time saving state.

The "new display of a character" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group preview presentation, or may be a different type of character from the character first displayed in the group preview presentation. good.

"Blessing performance" is a performance that displays an image that congratulates the variable display result having become a specific display result, and is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display display result becoming a specific display result. It is also a performance that displays images that celebrate things. "Congratulate" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, "bless" improves the player's expectations for an advantageous state by suggesting or informing that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. This includes causing someone to do something. For example, the blessing effect is that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the special figure 2 variable display section of the special figure LED board 9020 The combination of lighting modes in 9022 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, or the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are a specific special symbol ( This includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that a jackpot symbol has been reached or that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

"The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance" means that the group preview performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory, and then the blessing performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory. Including that the performance is executed. In addition, "the blessing performance can be executed after the group performance" means that the display result of the variable display based on the first pending memory is a specific display result. When a group preview effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or foretells the display result before the display result starts, the group preview effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the suspended memory of the 1 is started and the 1 is displayed. This includes executing a blessing effect within the variable display based on the reserved memory.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and in this embodiment, FIGS. 60 and 61 This is exemplified by the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss. , that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 corresponds to a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the combination of lighting modes corresponds to a loss; and the decorative pattern display area of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative symbols variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R become a specific predetermined symbol (losing symbol combination) and then stop. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" indicates to the player that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result due to the movable body 32 not operating at a specific timing, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. It's okay.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in this embodiment, This is exemplified by the period T3+T4, the period T5+T6, and the period T7+T8 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot. , that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the display is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative pattern that is being played becomes a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the movement of the movable body 32 at a specific timing suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. It's okay.

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 59).

From this, by making the second display period in which characters appear one after another in the group preview presentation the longest period, it is possible to make the group preview presentation more powerful. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from when a character first appears to when the character first leaves to the shortest period, it is possible to prevent group preview effects from being suddenly executed. I can do it.

(1-3) The first character displayed in the first display period is a character with a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yumu-chan, the main character).

As a result, the first character to appear in a group preview performance is a high-priority character such as the main character, and is a character familiar to the player, but after that, characters that appear less frequently than the main character in other performances, etc. By appearing in the group preview performance, the player can be surprised about the group preview performance and can be made to feel that it is a rare performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

"Characters with high priority" include characters that have the highest priority among the main character and characters other than the main character that appear in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the performance.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern with variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the display of the character in the group effect is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group preview effect will be executed near the second half even in the first half. This allows the lingering impression of the group preview performance to be extended to a later stage.

(1-5) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) indicates that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After making it appear that the variable display result is the specific display result, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, a variation pattern with variation numbers 23 and 26),
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is One display period starts (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61).

As a result, even in the case of a rescue pattern in which the display result of the variable display is made to appear to be a loss display result, and the display result of the variable display is a win display result, the fanfare performance, which is a blessing performance, is executed. , a group preview performance is performed during the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation, and even if the elation fades over time, a blessing performance is used to maintain or revive the elation. You can

(1-6) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result In the case of a pattern that suggests that it is (for example, the variation pattern of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result, A common display is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 87 to 136).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern with variation number 9 and the variation pattern with variation number 20 will perform a common effect until the display result is finalized, and the variation pattern with variation number 12 and the variation pattern with variation number 23 will display the same effect. A common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and a common effect is executed between the variation pattern with variation number 15 and the variation pattern with variation number 26 until the display result is confirmed. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

Note that the display result of the variable display is a pattern that suggests that the display result is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15), and the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result. (For example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are different displays until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result. may be performed.

Thereby, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while mutually different performances are being executed.

(1-7) The execution period of the group performance and a preview performance that is different from the group preview and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, SP first half title preview performance) The execution period of
The preview performance ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the preview effect (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 151 to 157).

Thereby, even if the group preview performance is executed while a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed, the SP first half title preview performance can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the preview effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 151 to 157).

Thereby, when a preview performance such as an SP first half title preview performance is being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the group preview performance. Note that the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance and the group preview performance do not start to be executed at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the preview effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. , group previews are more reliable than SP first half title previews).

As a result, other preview performances with lower expectations for jackpots than the group preview performances will not be displayed on the front layer, which has a higher priority than the group preview performances, so that players can receive jackpots in a favorable manner. suggestions can be made. In this manner, in the present embodiment, a performance with a low expectation level of a jackpot is not placed over the front side of a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the preview effect decreases, while the display of information regarding the game (for example, the number of first pending memories and the second pending memory) decreases in brightness. The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J showing the number, the small symbol 5M, the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when a group preview effect is executed, the brightness of the background display and images related to other preview effects (for example, images related to the SP first half title preview effect, which has lower expectations than the group preview effect) are lowered, while We give high priority to the display of information related to games that are of high importance to players in terms of winnings, losses, and advantages, and do not lower the brightness even when the group preview effect is executed. Can show information.

(2-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

The “first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed” means that the entire initially displayed character is still displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 57(a). A situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 while not being displayed, or a situation where the gaming machine frame 3 is displayed as an image, as shown in FIG. 94(a). In the display area that is visible to the player while covering the screen of the device 5, the entirety of the initially displayed character is not yet displayed, but the character is displayed at the edge of the display area that is visible to the player. Including situations where part of the is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first character appearing is not completely visible, but a part of the first character appearing is visible.

“A second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed” is shown in FIG. 57(b). As shown in FIG. 94(b), and the second displayed character is not displayed in its entirety, but a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 94(b). As shown in , in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character that was initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the end of the display area that is visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and while the entire second displayed character is not yet displayed, the character is visible to the player. This includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears following the first character before the first character appears completely.

(2-2) In the group effect, the character displayed first and the character displayed second have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, so it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be multiple characters, so it is possible to further prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output while the first character to be displayed in the group performance is being displayed, but the sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output before the display of the second character to be displayed starts. (For example, the example shown in FIG. 94).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output and the first character appears, thereby informing the player that the group preview performance has been executed. Since the start sound ends before the character appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group preview effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but ends by the time the second character appears. .

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include characters whose whole bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies do not fit within the display area of the screen and characters whose whole bodies are displayed outside of the display area of the screen. includes a character that is displayed within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 53).

This allows more characters to appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character is displayed so that the whole body fits within the display area of the screen, and the first character whose whole body is displayed within the display area of the screen. The first character, which does not fit within the display area of the screen but is displayed with other parts of the whole body within the display area of the screen, is displayed in a mixed manner (for example, the example shown in FIG. 53).

Thereby, it is possible to create the illusion that more types of characters appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered by a shielding object (for example, the gaming machine frame 3), and the character that is first displayed in the group presentation is displayed at the position covered by the shielding object. starts, and then the display of the second displayed character starts,
Even if the screen is viewed while covered by the shielding object, the first situation changes to the second situation in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, there is no situation where only one person is displayed in a group preview effect, so there is no question as to whether or not it is a group preview effect, and only one person appears. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that this is not the case.

(2-8) When viewing the gaming machine from the side toward between the screen and the shielding object, it is possible to view the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a player views the pachinko machine 1 from the side and sees the edge of the screen, there is no situation where only one player is displayed in the group preview presentation, so the group preview presentation It is possible to avoid questions such as whether or not this is true or not, or the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display related to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shielding object on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, a display related to the group effect is created on a screen of a predetermined size (for example, In order to be applicable to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches), a display related to the group effect is created up to an area corresponding to the large size.

Thereby, even if the design of the pachinko game machine 1 is suddenly changed to use a size larger than the predetermined size, the data of the created group preview effect can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include low importance characters (for example, maids C to F) that are less important in the content of the gaming machine, and characters that are more important than the low importance characters. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the content of the gaming machine,
The high-importance character is displayed at a lower rate than the low-importance character, whose face does not fit within the display area of the screen and the parts of the whole body other than the face fit within the display area of the screen (for example, Example shown in 53).

Thereby, characters with high importance such as the main character can have their faces more easily recognized in the group preview presentation than characters with low importance such as supporting characters, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47) that executes a performance,
The performance executed by the performance execution means includes a group performance (for example, a group preview performance shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The group performance is a performance that displays the largest number of characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, in the group preview performance, the largest number of characters appear among all the performances, so it is possible to make the player aware that a variable display is being performed in which he can expect to win a jackpot.

"The group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances that are executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory of 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is displayed variablely, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when a jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect that has the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory in 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is variablely displayed, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when the jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the production with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens in the group preview production is included. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

(3-2) A performance in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group performance, and a specific performance in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, the second half of the SP reach or the final reach) is executed.

This makes it possible to perform a variety of performances, among which the largest number of characters can appear in the group preview performance.

Note that the specific performance may be a performance in which the number of types of characters to be displayed is greater than that of the group preview performance.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is greater than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

Thereby, a powerful performance can be shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest period among the group preview performances.

Note that the number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group preview performance may be greater than the number of character types displayed in the specific performance.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the group performance,
An auxiliary display will be displayed to show that the character is progressing.
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character takes priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 54).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by providing an auxiliary display for characters, it is possible to show a more dynamic group preview effect to the player, but since the auxiliary display does not obstruct the visibility of other characters, it is possible to display more characters. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display that shows that the character is progressing; for example, an image display that emphasizes that the character is progressing as shown in FIG. For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of the character's path (for example, an image display of the character's footprints), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display of the character's footprints). , an image display representing the character's aura). The "auxiliary display" may be any image display that is performed near the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The character display in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect have different layers displayed on the screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the image of sand smoke is layer 1, the character images are placed in layers after layer 2).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the character images and the auxiliary display can be suitably shown to the player.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10),
The video data corresponding to the group effect includes first character data (e.g., video data of character C in layer 9) and second character data (e.g., character C in layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. video data),
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values regarding the moving speed of the character, but have the same animation parameter values regarding the character's motion.

As a result, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movements, it is possible to reduce the work steps involved in designing the group preview effect.

(4-4) In the group effect, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 52).

Thereby, since a plurality of characters do not move in the same way at the same position, it is possible to suitably show the group preview effect to the player.

(5-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, the display of a newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, in FIG. Example shown in 96).

The "newly displayed character" may be the second character that appears in the group preview presentation as shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, or the character that appears third or later in the group preview presentation. It's okay. Considering that the group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters advance as a group, the second character that appears in the group preview performance is the first character displayed as the "newly displayed character." It is preferable for the second character to appear immediately after the character to overtake the first character to create a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, since the second character to appear disappears at the top, overtaking the first character to appear, it is possible to present a lively group preview performance to the player.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a character that overtakes other characters,
The number of overtaking characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the group preview presentation from becoming too complicated, and it is possible to present the group preview presentation with a sense of dynamism to the players. can be shown.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is smaller than the outline of the other character. Also displayed in bold (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

This allows the player to easily see how the character overtakes other characters.

(6-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Executing a suggestion effect (for example, a PUSH effect) that displays a suggestion image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!") that suggests the execution of the group effect. means (for example, processing for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The display of the suggestion image ends before the first display period in the group effect starts (for example, the example shown in FIG. 93).

The "suggestive image" may be any image that suggests the execution of a group preview effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. 93. , it may be an effect image such as a light or pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of a group preview effect, or it may be a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group preview effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image that suggests the execution of a group preview effect (for example, a character image of "Group"). In addition, in the timer performance, the time until the group preview performance is executed is measured using a clock image, and when the time measured reaches a predetermined time, a character image (the character "Group") indicating the execution of the group preview performance is displayed. (images) may also be displayed.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the character appears first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) ends, the display of the character starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, example shown in FIG. 93).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!"),
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operation means is operated during the display of the suggestion image ends before the character display starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, in FIG. 93 example shown in ).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-4) When the operation means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of performances including the group performance (for example, a six-person group preview, a background preview, a lamp preview) is executed. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 93, 102, and 103).

As a result, a plurality of performances are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(7-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
Group effect execution means (for example, group effect execution processing shown in FIG. 47, 6 shown in FIGS. 94-100 Equipped with a group of people preview performance, a group of dogs preview performance shown in Figures 168 to 170),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The group performance includes a first group performance (for example, a six-person group preview performance) and a second group performance (for example, a dog group preview performance),
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1),
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2),
the first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured such that the straight-line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 170). .

The "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in a group preview performance such as a six-person group preview performance or a dog group preview performance, as shown in Figure 170. This is the straight-line distance (distance along the X-axis) from the end of the character to the end of the character that is last displayed. This straight-line distance is determined by the time T, where T is the time from when the first character is displayed to when the last character is displayed from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and the speed of each character is V. It can be calculated by multiplying the speed V (T×V).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, two types of group preview effects can be suitably shown to the player.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1/V1) is the same or approximately the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2/V2) (for example, as shown in FIG. example shown).

Thereby, two types of group preview effects can be executed using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the first group effect is executed,
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for dog group preview performances that have a lower execution probability and higher expectations than six-person group previews, by making the speed of the characters slower than for six-person group previews, for example, a player can take a picture of a character in a dog group preview performance. You can increase your chances of doing so.

(7-4) The degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the second group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2) is the degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the first group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2). degree D1).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and movement distance of the characters, so that it is possible to provide the player with a suitable group preview performance.

(7-5) In the second group production, a plurality of characters located at the end of the screen are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 169).

Thereby, it is possible to use the group preview performance as an opportunity to switch to an image for the next performance and show it to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group effect execution process shown in FIG. 47, a Boingo effect shown in FIGS. 158 to 167) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a group preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen,
At a timing related to the initial start of display of the character at the specific position, a preliminary display (for example, display of a preliminary image using a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the particular position difficult to see is performed (for example, , example shown in FIG. 158).

The "previous display" may be any display that makes it difficult to see the character, and may be any display that hides the specific position where the character appears (for example, display of effect images such as lights or patterns) etc.). "Difficult to see" refers to a state in which the player cannot see a specific position completely, a state in which the player can see a certain position but it is difficult to see it, a state in which the player can see a certain position but the character is not visible from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance of the character appearing cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize a specific position and can visually recognize the appearance of the character from the specific position, but it is difficult to visually recognize the character.

"Timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position" means the same timing as the first start of character display at a specific position, or the timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position. This includes timings within predetermined periods before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player is under the illusion that this is the timing at which the display of the character first starts at a specific position).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size, which may cause an unnatural feeling such as a large character suddenly being displayed. to prevent players from experiencing this.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to proceed from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen,
The enlarged character makes it difficult to see the character displayed at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 164).

This makes it possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if multiple characters are appearing one after another from a certain depth.

(8-3) The character that is displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end (example shown in FIG. 162). .

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) In conjunction with the action of the character displayed last in the group performance, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent performance (for example, in FIG. 162 , example shown in FIG. 163).

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end,
No other characters in the group presentation are displayed on the back side of the last character displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 164).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image, and it is as if multiple characters are being placed one after another from a position with depth. It is possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if a character is appearing.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. The performance sound is output.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance at the specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled to be raised or lowered by the sound output means, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but the volume increase or decrease is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. The volume may be raised or lowered depending on the sound.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound rises to a specific volume is the fade-in time from when the volume of the production sound starts to decrease in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

As a result, the sound in the group preview performance is faded in for a short time and faded out for a longer time than the fade in, so that the sound for the group preview performance can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
A plurality of lighting means (for example, game effect lamps 9 such as frame lamps),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
A brightness data table composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, a frame lamp shown in FIG. 64(a)). a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, a grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in FIG. 64(b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. a data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W3 shown in FIG. 64(c));
Each of the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table includes first brightness data that is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness. and a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, as shown in FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 64),
The second brightness data table is set to light more of the lighting means at higher brightness than the first brightness data table (for example, the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps). High brightness ('0' to 'F') data is stored in more lamps than the number of lamps.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and since the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at higher brightness than the first brightness data table, the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at higher brightness than the first brightness data table. In the second display period, weak footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, strong footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear one after another, providing a more suitable group preview effect to the player. can be provided.

"Data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness" are the data for the plurality of lighting parts included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1, This is the lighting data (lighting element) for each time (WWW) in the upper lamp 9C, and for example, in the example shown in FIG. be. Note that as RGB data, data corresponding to turning off the light is "000," data corresponding to low-intensity lighting is "100," and data corresponding to high-intensity lighting is "F00."

"Brightness data" is lighting data for each lighting means (for example, frame lamp, panel lamp 9C) for each hour, and includes "data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 64(a), this is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The brightness data table is a collection of "brightness data" for a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified in the parent table or child table), and for example, in the example shown in FIG. 64(a), T1-1 to T1- This is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R in No. 11.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer brightness data switching interval than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals). , the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, it can be expressed that the character is running faster in the second display period than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are equal intervals, while in the second luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are not equal intervals (for example, as shown in FIG. 63). (The grandchild table W1 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 100 msec, and the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec.)

Thereby, in the second display period, it is possible to express that a plurality of characters are running out of step, compared to the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-1) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for moving the lighting location in the direction in which the characters advance in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of advance of the notice),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that does not move the lighting location in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (lights up with brightness).

This makes it possible to represent a character appearing in the first display period and a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-2) The first brightness data table lights up the lighting means located near the character at high brightness in accordance with the advancing position of the character first displayed in the group presentation, so that the character It includes luminance data for turning off or lighting at low luminance the lighting means located near the unreached location (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)).

As a result, the lamp will turn on at high brightness as the first character that is displayed at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or turn on at low brightness in areas that have not yet been reached, so the lamp will not turn on. It can be used to express the progress of a character running at the front. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-3) The first brightness data table causes the lighting means to turn on at high brightness, and then, as the first character displayed in the group presentation advances, the lighting means turns off or turns on at low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, the example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)).

As a result, the lamp will turn on at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or turn on at low brightness at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. , the progress of the leading character can be expressed using the lighting of lamps. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-4) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness, and then lights up at high brightness the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group presentation. (For example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness, and then does not cause the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance to light up at high brightness (for example, FIG. 64 (Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp turns off at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit at low brightness, the progress of the character running at the front can be expressed using the lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-5) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness and turns off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 64(a) Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and for lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in FIG. 64(b) example).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp turns off at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit at low brightness, the progress of the character running at the front can be expressed using the lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-1) The third brightness data table includes brightness data for increasing the number of lighting means to be turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, Table W3 is turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice).

Accordingly, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness as the character progresses, so it is possible to express the progress of the character using turning off or lighting the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-3) The third brightness data table specifies that the switching interval of brightness data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located opposite to the direction in which the frame moves (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec) (The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to represent the character progressing from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappearing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and control of the lighting means ends during the first display period,
The second luminance data table indicates that control of the lighting means starts during the first display period, continues control of the lighting means during the second display period, and starts control of the lighting means during the third display period. control of the means ends;
In the third brightness data table, control of the lighting means starts during the third display period (for example, the example of the group preview brightness data table shown in FIG. 85).

As a result, the lamp lights up at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, so the progress of the character from before the second display period can be enlivened and expressed by the lighting of the lamp. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-2) The second luminance data table has a longer control period for the lighting means than the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table,
In the first brightness data table, the control period of the lighting means is set longer than in the third brightness data table (for example, the example of the group preview brightness data table shown in FIG. 85).

Thereby, the appearance of a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the first display period can be expressed with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-1) The brightness data first specified in the first brightness data table is the brightness data that causes the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low brightness (for example, as shown in FIG. 63). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the initial luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on at low brightness).

As a result, the lamps will be turned on once the group preview performance is executed after adding a break, without mixing with the lighting of the lamps that was performed before the group preview performance is executed, making it more suitable. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(14-2) The brightness data initially specified in each of the second brightness data table and the third brightness data table is a brightness that does not cause the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low brightness. data (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamps are lit at high brightness for the first brightness data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group preview effect has been executed, the player can watch the group preview effect without being separated by turning off all the lamps or lighting them at low brightness, with emphasis on the flow of the effect. can be shown. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-3) The last luminance data specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data that causes the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low luminance (for example, as shown in FIG. 63). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on at low brightness).

Thereby, when the group preview performance ends, all the lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize that the group preview performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 63, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2.) brightness data is specified as follows).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed so as not to repeat luminance data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the same luminance data is not repeated in the frame lamp grandchild table W3). Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, with regard to the brightness data in the third display period, which is set to be shorter than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the brightness data as is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 63, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps. The brightness data is specified as follows),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is defined last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not defined last (for example, As shown in FIG. 63, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and 10-minute data for troubleshooting is not defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W2).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data in the first display period, the brightness data is specified as is, but instead, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is specified, so that troubleshooting can be done during that 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-2) The brightness data for troubleshooting is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and the brightness data is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and This is brightness data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent lamp lighting control from being performed from the beginning of the first luminance data table using the 10-minute data for troubleshooting, so it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-3) The brightness data for troubleshooting is brightness data for regularly lighting up the adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes The brightness data is such that adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and regularly so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a malfunction occurs, adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and in a regular manner so that the lighting location is shifted from the previous state, making it possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unsightly. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(17-1) The lighting means includes monochrome lighting means that lights up in a single color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8), and multi-color lighting means that lights up in a plurality of colors (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9). ~9C13),
The brightness data for lighting the monochrome lighting means at a specific high brightness includes a specific value (for example, "6") as a value corresponding to the lighting at the specific high brightness,
The brightness data for lighting the multi-color lighting means at the specific high brightness includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, "8" to "F") as a value corresponding to lighting at the specific high brightness.

This makes it possible to adjust the variation in light between lamps that are lit at high brightness by setting an appropriate value for lighting at high brightness depending on the type of light emitting means, and to create a suitable group preview effect. can be provided.

(17-2) The monochrome lighting means includes a first color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a first color, and a second color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a second color. lamps 9B1 to 9B5);
Regardless of the luminance data for lighting either the first color lighting means or the second color lighting means at the specific high brightness, the specific value (for example, " 6”).

As a result, variations in light can be adjusted even between lamps that are lit in the same single color, and a suitable group preview effect can be provided.

(18-1) Both the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include different brightness data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, in FIG. Frame lamp grandchild table shown),
The brightness data table used in a preview performance that is different from the group performance and foretells that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result is based on the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine. Common brightness data is included for each (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 71).

As a result, in the group preview performance, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, it is possible to realize a more detailed lighting mode, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. can.

(19-1) During the execution of a preview effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, the group effect interrupts. It may be executed with
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light up according to the brightness data table corresponding to the preview effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 171 and 172),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the preview performance, or includes the lighting means used in the preview performance and the lighting means not used in the preview performance. (For example, as shown in FIG. 70, in the reach line performance, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and attacker lamp, which are always used in the group preview performance, are not used).

As a result, even if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, since the common lamp is lit, the lighting performance can be realized without any discomfort, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. be able to. For example, if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the lighting of lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of lamps in the other preview performance will be mixed, but if the lamps lit in both are If they are different from each other, a large number of lamps will be lit in a complicated manner, which will look bad and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this regard, if the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance is the same as the lighting of the lamps in other preview performances, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from being lit in a complicated manner.

(19-2) The preview performance ends during the execution of the group performance, and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol feeding performance) that is different from the preview performance is executed (for example, FIGS. 171 and 172). example shown),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 171 and 172).

As a result, even if the group preview performance is switched to another performance, the common lamp is lit, so it is possible to realize the lighting performance without any discomfort, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. .

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group preview lottery shown in FIG. 30).

As a result, whether or not to perform the group preview performance is decided by lottery regardless of other performances, so the processing load related to the execution of the group preview performance can be reduced, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. .

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
The specific lighting means can be turned on when controlling to the advantageous state, and does not turn on when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is set to turn on during a round in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur). (Lights up to notify you that it is inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 63).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters move in the group preview performance lights up during the group preview performance, causing the player to misunderstand that they are in an advantageous state such as winning the jackpot. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group performance,
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and the trigger The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the user to press the push button 31B),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 63).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters move in the group preview effect lights up during the group preview effect, causing the player to misunderstand that the lamp is prompting the player to operate the operating means. This can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Modified example]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained.

(About the display period of group preview performances)
In this embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

Thereby, by making the character that first appears in the first display period appear longer, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the fact that the group preview effect suggesting a jackpot has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, there is a 100% probability that the group preview effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time, but this is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the second half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the variable display result is a winning display result, the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a 100% probability. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group preview)
In this embodiment, the main character, Maid A (Yume-chan), appears as the first character in the first display period, but the character that appears most often in the second display period is the main character, Maid A. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

Thereby, the main character can be frequently shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the first character displayed in the first display period may be a premium character.

Thereby, the premium character can be shown to the player first in the first display period, and the group preview performance can be made to have an impact. Note that if the first character displayed in the first display period is a premium character, a jackpot may be determined. Furthermore, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

Note that the premier character may be a character with the lowest appearance rate among all states and performances, or may be a character that does not appear except in group preview performances. Moreover, the premium character may be a character whose appearance suggests that there is a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than other characters.

(About lighting control in group preview presentation)
In this embodiment, the brightness data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 64, but the brightness data may be defined as follows. That is, first specific brightness data is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness, and data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness. There is second specific brightness data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness, the first brightness data table does not include the first specific lighting data, and the second brightness data table has Specific lighting data may also be used.

In this way, data for lighting at high brightness is not specified in the first display period, so it is possible to express the appearance of multiple characters approaching by lighting the lamp at low brightness, and the second display period During the display period, data that lights up at high brightness is specified, so it is possible to express the progress of a plurality of characters one after another.

Further, the third brightness data table may include brightness data that turns off all the lighting means that were turned on in the second brightness data table.

In this way, the progress and disappearance of the character in the third display period can be expressed by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
A specific member that can transmit light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means,
By lighting the specific lighting means, the color that is visible through the specific member becomes a specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include brightness data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table may not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means.

In this way, when a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in a group preview effect lights up during the group preview effect, the light is transmitted through the transparent specific member located in front of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the visually recognized color from being a specific color that is not used in the group preview presentation, thereby interfering with the color tone of the group preview presentation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(About the video data of the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, video data in which a character to be moved and the action content (action pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created at the design stage, and the video data was stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 plays back the video data stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It had become. However, the group preview presentation video may be played back using a method different from the above method.

For example, the data of the character to be acted upon and the data indicating the action details (movement pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 updates the character data and movement patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may also be possible to select each of the data shown in FIG.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or ROM 121, a plurality of pieces of data in which characters A, B, and C each run or walk are stored in storage area 1, and a plurality of arbitrary pieces of data are stored, although the characters are not determined. What is necessary is to store in the storage area 2 video data showing a plurality of movement patterns of the characters related to the group preview performance, and the performance control CPU 120 stores the characters from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes. The video data related to the group preview performance may also be extracted from the storage area 2, the video data of one group preview performance may be created by combining them, and the created video data may be played back.

(Regarding cases where the group preview performance and other preview performances overlap)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 169, when the execution period of a group preview effect and the execution period of another preview effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group preview effect is the same as that of the other preview effect. Larger than the image display area, and the image display in the group preview performance has priority over the display of images in other preview performances (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview performance is larger than the image display area in other preview performances) (in front of the displayed layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the execution period of a group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of another preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances may be in front of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). Alternatively, if the execution period of the group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances may be in front of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). In addition, if the execution period of a group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area in the group preview performance is The display may be prioritized over the display of images in other preview performances (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview performance is in front of the layer of image display in other preview performances). In addition, when the display area of images in other preview performances is larger than the display area of images in the group preview performance, for example, for preview images that attract the attention of players, such as images suggesting a jackpot, the image display area in the group preview performance may Images that are hidden but located around the preview image (for example, images showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) include images that are not hidden by images in the group preview presentation and are visible.

(Example of time saving control without going through hit)
Next, as a time saving state, an example will be described in which time saving control is executed without going through a win (big hit, small hit, etc.).
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base (state). That is, as the time saving state, time saving control that does not involve winning (big hit, small winning, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and When using a small winning symbol random number, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a fall lottery judgment value in a time saving symbol lottery, a random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. , a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time-saving symbol being displayed, game control is not performed to move from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, the time-saving state is overwritten (time-saving It may also be possible to control switching of the gaming state so that it occurs again. Then, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol (For example, in the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general losing symbol is displayed.) Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, a decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is performed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol); however, in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It may be arranged not to provide left-handed hitting notification (notification instructing left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and when the variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information is displayed. In the case of a hit (small hit, jackpot) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to the hit is different. It may be different. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined performance different from the common specific performance (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a win (a display that has been moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) The expectation level (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) is made to differ depending on the performance mode of the display display that can suggest the expectation level of winning corresponding to the variable display of Good too. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time saving states (special states) in which the number of time saving times (time saving continuation period) differs according to the types of time saving symbols (special display results) provided (for example, the number of time saving symbols (special display results)). (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the pending storage information, pre-reading of the pending storage information that has occurred after the pending storage information where it has been specified that a variable display that can be shifted (controlled) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Execution of the preview performance may be restricted. Then, as the pre-read preview performance while the execution of such a pre-read preview performance is restricted, a common mode of performance may be made possible. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B24) When the variable display whose prefetch target is based on pending memory information is a variable display in which a time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and when the variable display that is not displayed as if the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the case of display and the case of display, the execution of a prefetch preview effect for pending storage information generated after the relevant pending storage information may be restricted. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using a variable number of displays that resulted in a predetermined display result, such as a variable display number of losers)
Next, an example of time saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of consecutive variable displays resulting in a loss) that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that does not become a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As shown below, the time saving state (special state) is when the number of consecutive variable displays with a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times). It may be possible to execute the following condition. Note that the predetermined result may be such that a time saving state (special state) can be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in a losing display result reaches a special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, the game is played based on the fact that the variable display result becomes the specific display result. The numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the user and that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is updated. Based on the above, when a special condition is established in which the number of executions (continuation number) of the variable display that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.), the normal state changes to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to transfer. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, even in situations where either the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained continues to be updated, making it easier for players to be relieved in a time-saving state. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player due to the time saving condition.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You may also do so. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. I can do it.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control to a time saving state (special state) for a period equal to or more than the special number of times (for example, further 1000 times or more, etc.); During the time saving state (special state), the time saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state); A different effect may be performed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shorter in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It becomes possible to change the appearance of the performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, without performing such a performance, the same performance may be performed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming more aware of the fact that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled to a second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, a right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You can also do this. Further, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). It's okay. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special pattern process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a fourth numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated.

(C15) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special condition (variable number of display times). It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time saving state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, a time saving state performance is performed in which the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time saving state is entered.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 stores predetermined information ( A ram clear command at the time of a cold start, a command notifying the number of fluctuation display until the end of the time saving state at the time of a hot start) can be sent to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, based on receiving the predetermined information, Suggestions regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effects that suggest that the number of times the variable display is executed are different in the morning, the background image is different, and that within 100 revolutions variation is far or near) are executed. (e.g. easy to execute). Since the player is given an incentive to play first thing in the morning, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information regarding the time saving state) to the performance control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 It may also be possible to perform a special performance (such as a performance suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled into a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information) and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). Good too. Thereby, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss, and it is also possible to suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances (such as different performances when shifting to the time saving state) are performed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of a condition. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Each configuration regarding the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined with a part or all of the configurations regarding other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize opening 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 9020 Special LED board 21 Gate switch 22A 1st starting port switch 22B 2nd starting port switch 23 Count Switch 24 V winning switch 30 Ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passage gate 9050 4th symbol unit 81, 82, 83 Solenoid 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 120 Production control CPU
123 Display control unit.
75SG001 Pachinko gaming machine 300 First presentation unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second presentation unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decoration section 600 Third presentation unit 800 Fourth presentation unit 801 Base Member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A production execution means is provided.
The effect execution means is capable of executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The performance execution means is
When executing the group effect based on the first variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect based on the second variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from a predetermined number of frames ;
By displaying the character whose display ends last in the third display period in an enlarged manner, the character is displayed in the first display period while reducing the visibility of the background image that was displayed in the first display period. switching from the previously displayed background image to a different background image, and performing the group effect so that the different background image becomes visible in conjunction with the end of the display of the character;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images